Pioneer DVR-320-S Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder DVR-320- S Operating Instructions TM RL_s Singapore.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING: The apparatus is not waterproofs, to prevent fir e or shocks hazard, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture and do not put any water source near this apparatus, such as vase, flower pot, cosmetics container and medicine bottle etc. D3-4-2-1-3_En CAUTION This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. D3-4-2-1-8_En The ST ANDBY/ON switch is secondar y connected and therefore, does not separate the unit from mains power in ST ANDBY position. Therefore install the unit suitable places easy to disconnect the MAINS plug in case of the accident. The MAINS plug of unit should be unplugged from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time. D3-4-2-2-2a_En W ARNING: BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULL Y . The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_En RL_s Singapore.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
W ARNING: No naked flame sources, such as lighted candle, should be placed on the apparatus. If naked flame sources accidentally fall down, fir e spread over the apparatus then may cause fir e. D3-4-2-1-7a_En VENTILA TION: When installing this unit, make sure to leave space ar ound the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensur e reliable operation of the product and to pr otect it from overheating, to prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. D3-4-2-1-7b_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC â 35 úC ( 41 úF â 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ⢠Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ⢠Location exposed to high humidity , or poorly ventilated location D3-4-2-1-7c_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En This pr oduct includes F ontAv enue î fonts licenced b y NEC corpor ation. F ontAvenue is a r egist er ed tr ademark of NEC Corpor ation. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En RL_s Singapore.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9 02 Connecting up Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Using other types of video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) . . . 15 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) . . . 16 Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 04 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Making your first recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 30 05 Playback Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Navigating discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Switching DVD soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 06 Recording About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Recording time and picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 43 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 51 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 51 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 52 Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 07 Editing The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Editing VR mode Original and Video mode content .5 6 Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . . 60 08 Disc History Using the Disc History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 09 The PhotoViewer Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 10 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 11 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . . 71 Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 12 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 RL_s Singapore.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Recording settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Playback settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 13 Additional information Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . 87 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . . 93 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 RL_s Singapore.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠Chase play Using chase play you can start watching a recording before the recording has finished. For example, you could set a timer recording for a program that youâÂÂre going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead of you. ⢠Simultaneous recording and playback This feature allows you to record a broadcast program while watching something else already recorded on the same disc. ⢠Disc Navigator The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way around the contents of a disc easy. For recordable DVD content, moving thumbnail images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator is also where you can edit recordable DVD content. ⢠Disc History The Disc History screen shows disc information, including how much free space remains for recording, for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder. Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is automatically updated with the latest information. ⢠Home Menu The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the recorderâÂÂs features in one convenient place, from setting up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and editing a recording. ⢠Progressive scan-compatible Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan effectively doubles the amount of video information fed to your TV or monitor. The result is a stable, flicker-free image. (Check your TV/monitor for compatibility with this feature.) ⢠Cinema surround sound in your home Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS- compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs. ⢠Easy Timer Recording Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to record and the recording quality, then graphically set the start and end times of the recording. ThatâÂÂs it! ⢠Program up to 32 timer recordings You can program the recorder to record up to 32 programs, up to a month in advance, using the G-Code⢠system * for easy programming if you want. As well as single programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings, too. * G-Code is registered in at least the following countries: Australia, China, Hong Kong, Japan, New Zealand, South Korea, Taiwan and Singapore. The G-Code system is manufactured under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. ⢠One Touch Recording Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the î REC button, the recording time is extended by another 30 minutes. ⢠Optimized recording Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc with the settings that you made. ⢠Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or other set top box With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC inputs of this recorder, you can start and stop recording automatically according to the timer settings of the set top box. ⢠High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio When recording using one of the high quality record settings ( FINE or MN32 ), the audio is recorded in uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers great sounding audio to accompany the high picture quality. ⢠Picture quality adjustment features During playback, you can adjust various picture quality settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the recording picture quality. For example, if you want to make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize the picture quality before transferring it to disc. ⢠Find what you want to watch quickly and easily Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc by title, chapter or time. VR mode VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En ⢠Manual recording In addition to the four preset recording quality modes ( FINE , SP , LP and EP ), the manual recording mode allows you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings, giving you precise control over the recording. ⢠Safe, non-destructive editing When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited version (the Play List content) just points to various parts of the Original content. ⢠Chapter marking You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your recordings for easy editing. ⢠Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD player Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible with DVD-Video playback * . * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. ⢠WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs. VR mode VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) ⢠RF antenna cable ⢠Power cable ⢠These operating instructions Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Note Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of batteries togetherâ although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control Set on page 75 and Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 87 to reset them. ⢠Use within the operating range and angle, as shown. ⢠You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component using the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 12 for more information. 30 30 7m RL_s Singapore.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En Disc / content format playback compatibility General disc compatibility This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable formatâÂÂsee below for further compatibility information. ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. This recorder also supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. DVD-R/RW compatibility This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs. Compatible media: ⢠DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x ⢠DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x Recording formats: ⢠DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode) ⢠DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD- Video format (Video mode) Older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. To share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs. The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorder compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs 1 . 1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. 2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. 3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. CD-R/RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. ⢠Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD) ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) ⢠Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended) ⢠Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No (see also DRM in the Glossary on page 96) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable) DVD-Video DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Fujicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW VIDEO CD Su per Video CD (Super VCD) Model Playable Recordable DVR-7000 Yes 1,2,3 No DVR-310/ DVR-510H Yes 1 No RL_s Singapore.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility The Windows Media î logo printed on the box indicates that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media î Player version 7, 7.1, Windows Media î Player for Windows î XP, or Windows Media î Player 9 Series. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files * File format used by digital still cameras ⢠Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0 ⢠Horizontal resolution: 160 â 5120 pixels ⢠Vertical resolution: 120 â 3840 pixels ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Frequently asked questions ⢠WhatâÂÂs the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW? The most important difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium, while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium. You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc approximately 1,000 times. For more information, see About DVD recording on page 42. ⢠WhatâÂÂs VR mode? VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible editing of recorded material compared to âÂÂVideo modeâÂÂ. On the other hand, Video mode discs are more compatible with other DVD players. ⢠Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player? Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded in Video mode * are playable in a regular DVD player, but they must be âÂÂfinalizedâ first. This process fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs. DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in some players. This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device. Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs recorded using this recorder will play on other players. * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. This recorder supports the recording of âÂÂcopy-onceâ broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection system (see CPRM on page 43) on CPRM-compliant DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. RL_s Singapore.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 11 En ⢠Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of editing can I do? Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making a âÂÂPlay Listâ of what to play and when to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the Play List. Throughout this manual, you will often see the words Original and Play List to refer to the actual content and the edited version. ⢠Original content refers to whatâÂÂs actually recorded on the disc. Play List content refers to the edited version of the discâÂÂhow the Original content is to be played. Original Title 1 Play List Title 2 Title 1 Title 3 Title 2 Chapt er 1 C hapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 2 Chapt er 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 RL_s Singapore.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Rear panel connections 1 VHF/UHF IN/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the VHF/UHF IN jack. The signal is passed through to the VHF/UHF OUT jack for connection to your TV. 2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input. 3 Audio/video outputs 1 and 2 Two sets of audio/video outputs (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video video) that you can use to connect TVs or monitors. 4 Audio/video inputs 1 and 3 Two sets of audio/video inputs (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video video) that you can use to connect to satellite receivers, TVs, VCR or other source component for recording. 5 CONTROL IN Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the Pioneer î mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord. 6 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT A digital audio output for connecting to an AV amp/ receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder or other equipment with optical digital input. 7 AC IN Connect to a power outlet using the supplied power cable after making all other connections. Front panel connections On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides a third audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog audio jacks. CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL A UDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 PULL-OPEN VIDEO/R/RW VIDEO S-VIDEO RL_s Singapore.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 13 En Easy connections The setup described here is a basic configuration that allows you to record TV programs on both this recorder and your VCR. When watching recordings from this recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR. Important ⢠This recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this recorder) using AV cables, as the picture from this recorder will not appear properly on your TV. ⢠Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 1 Connect your TV antenna/cable TV outlet to the VHF/UHF IN jack on this recorder. 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to connect the VHF/UHF OUT jack on this recorder to the antenna input on your VCR. ⢠If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect this recorder directly to your TV and skip the next step. 3 Use an RF antenna cable to connect the antenna output on your VCR to the antenna input on your TV. 4 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV. Use the supplied three-pin audio/video cable. It is color- coded to help you match them up (red/white for the right/ left audio connections and yellow for video in/outs). Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. 5 Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN 2 above) using a set of audio and video cables. Note ⢠See the following page if you want to use S-video or component video cables for the video connection. TV VCR CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VHF/UHF IN VHF/UHF OUT VHF/UHF IN A/V IN 1 A/V IN 2 A/V OUT 1 2 3 4 5 RL_s Singapore.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 14 En Using other types of video output This recorder has standard (composite), S-video and component video outputs. The main difference between them is the quality of the picture. S-video delivers a better picture than composite video, while component video gives better picture quality still. The variety of outputs also gives you the flexibility of connecting your particular equipment using the best connection type available. 1 Connecting using an S-video output S-video carries the picture as separate color and luminance (brightness) signals. There are two S-video outputs for connection to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other equipment. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). 2 Connecting using the component video output Component video carries the picture as two separate color signals, plus a luminance (brightness) signal. See also Component Video Out on page 78 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scan-compatible TV. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). TV COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO INPUT COMPONENT INPUT 1 2 RL_s Singapore.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 15 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) If you are using a cable box or satellite receiver with only a few scrambled channels, follow the setup on this page. If many or all the channels are scrambled, we recommend using the setup on the following page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record unscrambled channels by selecting them on this recorder. ⢠Record scrambled channels by selecting them on the cable box/satellite tuner and using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 51). ⢠Watch one channel while recording another. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch the output from this recorder. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite tuner to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. Cable box/ Satellite receiver COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VHF/UHF IN VHF/UHF OUT VHF/UHF IN A/V OUT A/V IN 1 1 1 1 2 3 TV RL_s Singapore.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 16 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) If many or all the channels you receive by cable or satellite are scrambled, we recommend using this setup. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner. ⢠Record using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 51). Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch discs. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite tuner to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note ⢠The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another. ⢠The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. TV Cable box/ Satellite receiver COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VHF/UHF IN VHF/UHF OUT VHF/UHF IN A/V IN 1 A/V OUT 1 1 1 2 3 RL_s Singapore.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 17 En Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/receiver using the digital optical output. In addition to the digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the standard (composite) video output (as shown here), or the S-video or component video connections. See also Audio Out settings on page 79 for how to set up the digital audio output. (Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amp/receiver.) Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder to your TV âÂÂthroughâ your VCR or other component using A/V cables. Always connect it directly to your TV. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your AV amp/receiver. 3 Use an optical digital audio cable (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT jack on this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV amp/ receiver. This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound. 4 Connect the AV amp/receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. Note ⢠The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. ⢠If your AV amp/receiver doesnâÂÂt have an optical digital input, but has a coaxial type, converter boxes that convert from optical to coaxial are available at specialist audio dealers. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 VHF/UHF IN VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT A/V IN 1 DIGIT AL IN OPTICAL 2 4 1 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet 1 TV AV amp/ receiver RL_s Singapore.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 18 En Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 1 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input. 2 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. Plugging in After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. 1 Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet. Analog camcorder VCR î VIDEO/R/RW AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT 1 2 AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT AC IN RL_s Singapore.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 19 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 2 DISC HISTORY (page 65) Press to display the Disc History screen. 3 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 33, 54) Press to directly access the Disc Navigator screen. 4 IR remote sensor (page 8) 5 Disc tray 6 Front panel display See Display on page 20 for details. 7 /â (page 26, 28) Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc. 8 REC MODE (page 43) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). 9 î REC Press to start recording. 10 î Press to stop recording. 11 î Press to start or restart playback. 12 î Press to stop playback. 13 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 14 Front panel inputs (page 12) Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting camcorders and other portable equipment. PULL-OPEN STANDBY/ON DISC NAVIGATOR DISC HISTORY OPEN/CLOSE REC REC MODE î VIDEO/R/RW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 RL_s Singapore.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 20 En Display 1 î PLAY Lights during playback; blinks when paused. 2 î REC Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused. 3 PL (page 55, 60) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 42 3 (page 75) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). 5 REM Lights when the character display is showing the remaining available recording time. 6 (page 78) Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan. 7V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. 8R / RW Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or DVD-RW. 9 (page 44) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set but there isnâÂÂt a recordable disc loaded.) AUTO (page 51) Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and during Auto Start Recording. 10 Recording quality indicators (page 42) FINE Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play). EP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play). MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. 11 Character display 12 Channel recording indicators (page 79) Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. SAP (page 27) Lights when the currently selected TV channel has a Second Audio Program channel. 13 OVER (page 79) Lights when the analog audio input level is too high. 14 NTSC Lights when playing NTSC format video. 6 12 13 14 11 3 2 1 4 5 7 8 9 10 RL_s Singapore.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 21 En Remote control 1 Remote control indicator Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a TV (page 87) and when setting the remote control mode (page 75). 2 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 3 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 4 DVD playback functions AUDIO (page 27, 40, 41) Changes the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 40) Displays/changes the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ANGLE (page 41) Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 5 PLAY MODE (page 37) Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such as search, repeat and program play). 6 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. 7 INPUT SELECT (page 51) Press to change the input to use for recording. 8 CHANNEL /â (page 26) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 9 G-Code (page 47) Press, then use the number buttons to enter a G-Code programming number for timer recording. 10 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 33, 54) / TOP MENU (page 28) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 11 PLAY LIST (page 55, 60) / MENU (page 28) Press to switch between Original and Play List content on VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 12 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 13 HOME MENU (page 30) Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 14 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. 15 Playback controls (page 27) î REV SCAN / FWD SCAN î (page 35) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î PLAY Press to start playback. î PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. î STOP Press to stop playback. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the audio or video playing. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE TOP MENU MENU RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU INPUT SELECT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR ENTER CHANNEL PA USE STOP OK SKIP CM BACK REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN DISC HISTORY NAVI MARK CASE SELECTION CHP MARK EASY TIMER INPUT SELECT DISPLAY TV CONTROL CHANNEL VOLUME REC PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC î î î î CLEAR î î G- CODE 1 3 5 8 11 14 2 9 10 12 13 15 16 19 4 17 7 18 6 RL_s Singapore.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 22 En CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the audio or video playing. î PREV / NEXT î Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î STEP/SLOW î (page 36) During playback, press to start slow-motion playback; while paused, press to show the previous or next video frame. 16 Recording controls (page 26) î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. REC MODE (page 43) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). TIMER REC (page 46) Press to set a timer recording from the standard Timer Recording screen. EASY TIMER (page 45) Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer Recording screen. 17 DISC HISTORY (page 65) Press to display summary information (disc name, recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable discs loaded. NAVI MARK (page 34) Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current title for use in the Disc Navigator screen. CHP MARK (page 58) Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/ recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc. 18 DISPLAY (page 30) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 19 TV CONTROL (page 87) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. RL_s Singapore.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio output settings. If youâÂÂre using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. Note ⢠Some of the setup Navigator on-screen displays (OSDs) in this section vary slightly depending on the country or region of purchase. 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. 2 Press the î STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or the front panel to switch on. When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup Navigator doesnâÂÂt appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 75). 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to choose a language, then press ENTER . 4 Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup Navigator. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to use the Setup Navigator, press î (cursor down) to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select âÂÂAuto Scanâ to start automatic channel setup, then press ENTER. ⢠Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the channels (because they have already been set up, for example). DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ENTER î Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Language English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Cancel Complete this setup before you start using your recorder . Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Do not set Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 24 En ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose your country, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. 6 Select âÂÂAutoâ for automatic time setting, or âÂÂManualâ to set the clock manually, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that the time has been set, select Next to proceed. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Press î (cursor down) then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâ for summer time , then press ENTER . Select On if you are currently using summer time. Set the date and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN . Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Country Selection Country Singapore Initial Setup T uning 32/213 Cancel Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Manual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Next Initial Setup 01 01 2004 THU 11 20 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 Singapore Singapore Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator On Singapore Singapore Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time 1/ 2 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 Singapore Singapore Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En 7 Select the TV screen type, âÂÂStandard (4:3)â or âÂÂWide (16:9)âÂÂ. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then press ENTER . 8 Is your TV compatible with progressive scan video? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Compatible , Not Compatible , or DonâÂÂt Know , then press ENTER . ⢠Note that progressive scan video is only output through the component video outputs and only when the video source is NTSC (see page 14). 9 Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier/ receiver for digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Connected , or Not Connected , then press ENTER . ⢠If you select Not Connected , that completes the setup. Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select Go Back if you want to go back and start again. ⢠Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier/ receiver is compatible with. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Dolby Digital , Dolby Digital, DTS or PCM only , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure what itâÂÂs compatible with. 10 Is your AV amplifier/receiver compatible with 96 kHz PCM digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Compatible , Not Compatible , or DonâÂÂt Know , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure. 11 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select âÂÂGo Backâ if you want to start again. That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. Other settings you can make After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. ItâÂÂs possible, however, that you may want to make a couple of additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set up for TV broadcasts. ⢠Manual channel setting â This setting lets you skip channels where there is no station, as well as manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on page 76. ⢠G-Code channel setting â This setting lets you assign guide channels to ensure that the G-Code programming system works correctly. See G-Code CH Setting on page 77. ⢠Setting up the remote to control your TV â You can set up the supplied remote control to control many brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 87. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control SetSetup Navigator Setup Navigator TV Screen Size Wide (16:9) Standard (4:3) Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control SetSetup Navigator Setup Navigator Initial Setup Progressive Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Digital Connect Connected Not Connected Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Compatibility Dolby Digital Dolby Digital , DTS PCM only Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Compatible Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup is complete! Enjoy using your DVD recorder! Finish Setup Go Back Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 26 En Making your first recording This quick guide shows you how to make a basic recording of a TV program to a recordable DVD. Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6 ( Recording ). 1 If they arenâÂÂt already on, switch on your TV and this recorder. Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. ⢠Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this recorder. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the disc. ⢠When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder will take a moment to initialize it for recording. 4 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel you want to record from. ⢠You can also use the /â buttons on the front panel if the recorder is stopped. ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. 5 Press î REC to start recording. ⢠By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play) mode, which will give you around two hours of recording from a blank DVD disc. ⢠You can pause recording by pressing î PAUSE . Press î REC or î PAUSE again to restart recording. 6 When you want to stop recording, press î STOP REC. Playing back your recording The TV program you just recorded should be on the DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters. ⢠Press î PLAY to start playback. If you want to stop playback before the end of the recording, press î STOP . Using the built-in TV tuner Changing TV channels There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you canâÂÂt change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. ⢠CHANNEL /â buttons on the remote ⢠Number buttons on the remote â For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34, press 3 , 4 , ENTER . ⢠/â buttons on the front panel Note ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. ⢠You canâÂÂt change TV channels during playback or recording, or while in recording standby. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE CHANNEL REC STOP PLAY STOP REC î î î ENTER CHANNEL RL_s Singapore.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 27 En Changing audio channels ⢠Press AUDIO to change the audio. The current audio channel is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 79) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. ⢠If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. ⢠You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. ⢠Some TV programs are broadcast with both a main and a Second Audio Program (SAP). ⢠If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP channel being broadcast, you will still hear the main audio channel. ⢠If the sound is poor quality when set to Stereo , you can often improve it by changing to Mono . ⢠When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 79), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both ( L R ). Note ⢠When recording in Video mode, or in VR mode using the FINE / MN32 setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 79). ⢠In VR mode (excluding FINE / MN32 recordings), both channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. If SAP is selected then both SAP and mono channels are recorded. ⢠In Video mode, or if the recording mode is FINE / MN32 , only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language/audio program you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 79). For a SAP broadcast, select the channel you want to record ( Mono , SAP or Stereo ). Basic playback This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.). More playback features, such as repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. AUDIO NICAM Regular NICAM A NICAM B Regular NICAM A B A (L) B (R) A B (L R) Mono SAP St ereo LR L R RL_s Singapore.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 28 En 1 Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double- sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 29. 4 Press î PLAY to start playback. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. ⢠See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. 5 To stop playback, press î STOP. 6 When youâÂÂve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. ⢠To open/close the disc tray, press î OPEN/CLOSE . Remove the disc before putting the recorder into standby. ⢠Press î STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into standby. Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER STOP PLAY î î î î P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play- back starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â but- tons to do this during playback.) Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the num- ber buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER . All: P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. P ress to display the âÂÂtopâ menu or menu of a DVD-V ideo disc (these are often the same). Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD- Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. P ress to return to the previous level of a DVD-V ideo disc menu. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î TO P MENU MENU ENTER RETURN RL_s Singapore.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 29 En Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files. Note ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/ receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 41). ⢠Scanning doesnâÂÂt work with WMA tracks. Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs. Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch. P ress to start playback. P ress to stop playback. P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. CD and MP3 only: P ress to start scanning. P ress again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) P ress to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER P ress to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Video CD only: Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next track. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. Video CD only: Each press skips backward/ forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. Note that this function doesnâÂÂt work when playing in PBC mode. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward direction only). P ress to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î RETURN RL_s Singapore.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 30 En Note ⢠When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD /Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing î to start playback instead of î PLAY . Using the Home Menu From the Home Menu screen you can access all the features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu screen: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not available at the present time. For example, the Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that contains JPEG image files. Displaying disc information on- screen You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded. 1 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the on-screen information. ⢠The on-screen display automatically disappears after 150 minutes. 2 To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. The example displays below are a guide only; actual displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc. Stop display 1 1 DVD-RW Original / Play List If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback is currently set to Original or Play List . 2 Disc type and mode Shows the disc type ( DVD-R , DVD-RW , CD , etc.), and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable ( VR or Video ). 3 Recording mode and time Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. Home menu options Timer Recording (page 44) Disc Setup (page 68) Disc Navigator (page 33, page 54) Initial Setup (page 73) Disc History (page 65) Video/Audio Adjust (page 70) PhotoViewer (page 66) Play Mode (page 37) Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode RETURN HOME MENU ENTER DISPLAY î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name : Comedy shows Finalized Resume FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 1 2 8 7 10 9 3 6 4 5 RL_s Singapore.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 31 En 4 Resume Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last place stopped. 5 Recording time remaining Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in the current recording mode. 6 Preset name and number Shows the preset name and preset number for the currently selected channel. 7 Audio mode Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel preset ( Mono , Stereo , etc.). 8 Copy control information Shows recording restrictions of the current channel program. 9 Disc name Shows the disc name. (For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3 .) 10 Finalized Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized. Stop display 2 1 Date and time 2 Number of titles/tracks on disc For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play List titles are shown separately. Play display 1 1 Number of chapters in title 2 Current title and chapter number (For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG disc, shows current folder and file.) 3 Elapsed title time (For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.) 4 Total running time of title 5 Angle indicator Lights during multi-angle scenes. Play display 2 1 Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback Indicates that recording is in progress. 2 Elapsed chapter time 3 Total running time of chapter 4 Data transfer rate Shows the current data rate being read from the disc. 5 Copy protected material (!) / PureCinema indicator (#) Shows â ! â if the playback material is copy-once protected. Shows â # â if the current video is 24 fps, progressive scan. Recording display 1 Current title number 2 Elapsed recording time 3 Timer recording start and stop times Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is a timer recording. 4 Remaining recording time available Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current recording mode. 5 Recording mode Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Titles : Original 99 Lock Disc : On Play List 15 14:52 MON 15/11/2004 Copy Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 1 2 î Play DVD-R Video Title T otal Chapters 15 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 0. 11. 52 5 1 2 3 4 î Play DVD-R Video Title Name 11/21 soccer game : C hapter T otal îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî C hapter Time 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 ! # 0. 00. 21 0. 01. 52 4.32Mbps î Rec 5 2 3 4 1 î Rec DVD-R VIDEO FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m 21:00 â 22:00 30 . 00. 15 Co py Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 5 1 2 3 4 RL_s Singapore.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 32 En Note ⢠When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. ⢠Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality. ⢠The Video mode disc displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. ⢠The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the displayed record setting. ⢠Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. ⢠The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. ⢠Copy Once or CanâÂÂt Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV program contains copy control information. RL_s Singapore.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 33 En Chapter 5 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ î (cursor buttons) and ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3 discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW Commercially produced DVD or finalized Video mode DVD-R/RW Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized) VR mode DVD-RW Audio CD Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files MP3 files ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as making a program list, are not available in PBC mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by pressing î . ⢠For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 66. Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/ MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR (front panel or remote), which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select what you want to play. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to highlight items and ENTER to select. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different. DVD DVD-Video Video mode VR mode CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 MP3 DISC NAVIGAT OR HOME MENU ENTER DVD-Video CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode RL_s Singapore.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 34 En The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter within a title. The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks. The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area between CD and WMA/MP3 . This can only be done while the disc is stopped. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs When used with a recordable disc, the Disc Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play titles. See also Editing on page 54 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the menu options. Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a title to play. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls: Press DISC NAVIGATOR , then use the / â buttons to select a title. Press î PLAY to start playback. Note ⢠The Disc Navigator is only accessible when there is a disc loaded. ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD in PBC mode. ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use the time search mode. See Search Mode on page 37. Changing the thumbnail picture for a title You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI MARK button. DVD Title (1-10) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-003) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Disc Navigator CD T rack (1-10) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 T otal Time 0.58.25 Disc Navigator WMA/MP3 CD Folder (1-03) 01.Rock 02.Pop 03.Dance T rack (1-004) 001.Intro 002.Escape 003.Everything Y ou Say 004.What I Do Disc Navigator VR mode Video mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode NAVI MARK ENTER PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î RL_s Singapore.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 35 En 1 Start playback of the title you want to change the thumbnail for. 2 Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title. ⢠For greater control over the exact frame you want to use, you can use the î PAUSE and/or slow-motion/ frame advance/reverse controls ( î / î ). Navigating discs During playback you can easily jump to another title, chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on the remote. 1 During playback use the number buttons to enter a chapter number within the current title. For example, for chapter 6, press 6 ; for chapter 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new chapter. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a title number. For example, for title 6, press 6 ; for title 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new title. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a track number. For example, for track 6, press 6 ; for track 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new track. Scanning discs You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backward. 1 During playback, press î or î to start reverse or forward scanning. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠Forward: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Reverse: Reverse play î SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Forward/Reverse: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth. ⢠Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs (analog output only). ⢠Scanning is not possible with WMA files. ALL ENTER CLEAR DVD-Video Video mode VR mode CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN DVD CD Video CD S uper VCD MP3 RL_s Singapore.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 36 En ⢠No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video discs. ⢠Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 . (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output.*) No sound is output when using other scan speeds. * Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be played forwards in slow motion. 1 Press î or î to start slow motion reverse or forward playback. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played. ⢠Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. ⢠No sound is output during slow-motion playback. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc frame- by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î PAUSE. 2 Press î or î to back up or advance one frame. ⢠Hold down î or î for continuous frame reverse/ frame advance. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. DVD Video CD S uper VCD PLAY STEP/SLOW î î SL OW 1/16 SL OW 1/8 SL OW 1/2 SL OW 1/4 DVD Video CD S uper VCD PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î RL_s Singapore.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 37 En The Play Mode menu The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and program play functions. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Play Mode features with Video CD/ Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions, see the following sections. 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu screen. ⢠You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU ). 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to navigate. ⢠To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . Search Mode The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/ track number. 1 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select one of the search options. 3 Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/ folder/track number or the search time (in hours, minutes & seconds). Time Search (DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0 . For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0 . Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 45 minutes into the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0 . Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 . Alternatively, you can use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) buttons. 4 Press ENTER. Tip ⢠You can often select what you want to watch on a DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to display the disc menu. Note ⢠When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. ⢠Time search doesnâÂÂt work with Super VCDs. ALL PLAY MODE ENTER CLEAR PLAY Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Input Time 0.01.00 Play Mode RL_s Singapore.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 38 En A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs. 1 During playback, select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 With âÂÂA (Loop Start)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to start. After setting the loop start point, the highlight will automatically move down to B(Loop End) . 3 With âÂÂB (Loop End)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. ⢠When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. 4 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the A-B Repeat menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled. Repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Program play below). 1 Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select a repeat play mode. ⢠For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs, select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). 3 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂRepeat Offâ from the Repeat Play menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled. ⢠If there is a program list, you can also select Repeat Program to repeat the program list. DVD CD Video CD Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off Play Mode ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Repeat Disc Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off Play Mode VR mode DVD-Video Video mode CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 RL_s Singapore.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 39 En Program play This feature lets you program the play order of titles/ chapters/folders/tracks on a disc. 1 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select âÂÂInput/Edit Programâ from the list of program options. The Program edit screen that appears depends on the kind of disc loaded. On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD, Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3). 3 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter within a title to the program list. ⢠To add a title, select the title. ⢠To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press î (cursor right)and select a chapter from the list. For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a track within a folder to the program list. ⢠To add a folder, select the folder. ⢠To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press î (cursor right) and select a track from the list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ track, the step number automatically moves down one. ⢠To insert a step into the program list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER , all the subsequent steps move down one. ⢠To delete a step from the program list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR . 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/ folders/tracks. 5 To play the program list, press î PLAY. Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the recorder. Tip ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . ⢠You can change the program list by selecting Input/ Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu. ⢠During program play, press î to skip to the next program step. ⢠Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program play (if no menu OSD, such as the Play Mode menu, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program list. Other Program play functions As well as creating and editing a program list, you can start program play, cancel program play, and erase the program list from the Play Mode menu. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a program play function. ⢠Input/Edit Program â See above ⢠Start Program Play â Starts playback of a saved program list DVD-Video CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Input/Edit Program Start Program Play Cancel Program Play Erase Program List Play Mode Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title (1-38) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-004) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack (1-12) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 To tal Time 0.00.00 Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder (1-06) 01. Pop 02. Electronic 03. Jazz 04. Indie 05. Rock 06. Classic T rack (1-010) 001. T rack 01 002. T rack 02 003. T rack 03 004. T rack 04 005. T rack 05 006. T rack 06 007. T rack 07 008. T rack 08 Program RL_s Singapore.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 40 En ⢠Cancel Program Play â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Erase Program List â Erases the program list and turns off program play Note ⢠When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. ⢠You can use repeat play with program play. Start playback of the program list then select Program Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 38). Displaying and switching subtitles Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. 2 To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 81. Switching DVD soundtracks When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio soundtrack. Note ⢠The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 81. ⢠Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/ receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver on page 17 for connection details. DVD-Video SUBTITLE CLEAR Subtitle: 1/2 English The toucan lives in tropical forests DVD-Video AUDIO Audio : 1/2 Dolby Digital 2/0CH RL_s Singapore.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 41 En Switching audio channels For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or both ( L R ). When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. 1 To display/switch the audio channel, press AUDIO repeatedly. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on- screen. ⢠L R â Both channels (default) ⢠L â Left channel only ⢠R â Right channel only ⢠Stereo â Stereo (default) ⢠1/L â Left channel only ⢠2/R â Right channel only ⢠1 Stereo â Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default) ⢠1 L â Soundtrack 1 / Left channel ⢠1 R â Soundtrack 1 / Right channel ⢠2 Stereo â Soundtrack 2 / Stereo ⢠2 L â Soundtrack 2 / Left channel ⢠2 R â Soundtrack 2 / Right channel Note ⢠When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital î PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 80) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Angle Indicator on page 86). ⢠To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE. ⢠The angle number is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. ⢠Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while repeat playback is active. Note ⢠You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access. VR mode CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 AUDIO VR mode CD Video CD WMA/MP3 S uper VCD DVD-Video ANGLE RL_s Singapore.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 42 En Chapter 6 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW media. The main difference between the two is that DVD- R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times. A further difference between the two disc types is that only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording, which offers much more comprehensive editing functions compared to Video mode recording. The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes below). While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc will be in the chosen recording mode. Important ⢠You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/ RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs recorded on this recorder are not playable on other players/recorders.) ⢠This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder. ⢠Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Input Line System on page 74. Note ⢠Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. ⢠The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99. ⢠The maximum number of chapters recordable on a DVD-R/RW disc is 999. ⢠No more recording is possible on a disc that already contains the maximum number of chapters/titles. Recording time and picture quality There are four preset recording quality modes: ⢠FINE â Highest quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time. ⢠SP (Standard Play) â Default quality, sufficient for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time. ⢠LP (Long Play) â Slightly lower video quality, but doubles the recording time to around four hours. ⢠EP (Extended Play) â Use when maximum recording time is most important; EP gives you around six hours of recording time. In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different recording quality/time settings when manual recording mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 82), giving you precise control over the recording. When setting a timer recording there is a further option, AUTO , which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. In all except the FINE / MN32 modes, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE / MN32 , sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording in Video mode, or in VR mode on the FINE / MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 79) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. Note ⢠Note that all recording times (both here and those shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is because of the way that the video is recorded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what youâÂÂre recording. RL_s Singapore.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 43 En Restrictions on video recording ⢠You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy- protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. ⢠Video that is âÂÂcopy-once onlyâ can only be recorded on a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below). ⢠When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 30). CPRM CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system regarding the recording of âÂÂcopy onceâ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media . This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD- RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. ⢠This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Setting the picture quality/recording time Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are four standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. ItâÂÂs also possible to create a fifth, âÂÂmanualâ setting for picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this, however, you will need to set the Manual Recording option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording on page 82). ⢠Press REC MODE (remote or front panel) repeatedly to select a recording setting. ⢠FINE â Fine picture quality ⢠SP â Standard play ⢠LP â Long play ⢠EP â Extended play ⢠MN â Manual (available only when manual recording is on) The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 74) is Off then this information is not displayed.) VR mode Video mode REC MODE RL_s Singapore.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 44 En Basic recording from the TV Follow the instructions below to record a TV program. Recording starts immediately and continues until the disc is full or you stop the recording. 1 Load a recordable disc. ⢠If you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc. 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number: ⢠While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel. (For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER ; for channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER ) ⢠If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the /â buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. 3 Use the REC MODE button to set the picture quality/recording time. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time above for detailed instructions. 4 Use the AUDIO button to select the audio channel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 27 for more on this. ⢠When recording in VR mode, both mono and SAP audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to FINE / MN32 , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. 5 Press î REC to start recording. If you want to set a recording end time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time, press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording. (If recording in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts) 6 To stop the recording, press î STOP REC. ⢠If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the DVD. Setting a timer recording Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programs can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 83 for more on this). VR mode Video mode AUDIO ENTER CHANNEL REC PA USE STOP REC REC MODE î 23 30 7 Channel preset PR VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 45 En Important â¢A timer recording canâÂÂt be set if: â Auto Start Recording is in progress. â There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be recorded. ⢠Timer recording will not start if: â The recorder is already recording. â A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. ⢠Except when finalizing Video mode discs, timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. ⢠If a recordable DVD that doesnâÂÂt support simultaneous playback and recording (see Simultaneous recording and playback on page 50) is playing when a timer recording is due to start, playback will automatically stop to allow the recording to start. ⢠The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable. ⢠Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto Start Recording function (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 51). A timer recording will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start Recording will resume after the timer recording has finished.) ⢠Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby (assuming that a recordable disc is loaded). In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. 1 Press EASY TIMER. Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU and select Timer Recording then Easy Timer Recording ). 2 Set the TV channel and recording quality. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to set the channel you want to record. ⢠Use the REC MODE button to set the recording quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE , SP , LP , EP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording mode is on). DVD RECORDER RETURN HOME MENU EASY TIMER ENTER CHANNEL REC MODE îÂÂî 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 Easy Timer Recording FINE Pr 7 13/12 WED --:-- 9:30 CHANNEL / â REC MODE RL_s Singapore.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 46 En ⢠The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. 3 Use îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to move the cursor to the recording start date and time on the grid. ⢠You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at a time using the î and î buttons. Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 minute interval. The darker area represents time that has already passed and canâÂÂt therefore be selected. The lighter area is time thatâÂÂs available. 4 Press ENTER to set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. ⢠You can go back and reset the start time if you need to by pressing RETURN . 5 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor position, representing the length of the recording. A recording of up to six hours can be set. 6 Press ENTER to set the end time. 7 Select âÂÂYesâ to set the timer recording and exit, or âÂÂNoâ to go back to the timer recording screen. ⢠You can check the timer recording details you just set from the main timer recording screen (see Standard timer recording below). Standard timer recording The timer recording screen you can see all the timer programs already set, clear programs and set up new ones. 1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). This screen shows all the timer programs currently set. ⢠Each row is for one timer recording program, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode and recording status. ⢠The amount of free space available on the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen. ⢠In the lower-right corner, the number of timer programs already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms . ⢠If there are more than eight timer programs already set, press NEXT î to switch page (go back using the PREV î button). Easy Timer Recording 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 11:45 FINE Pr 7 13/12 WED Current time Recording start time - - : - - CHANNEL / â REC MODE Easy Timer Recording 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 15: 00 16: 00 17: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 11:45 13:45 FINE Pr 7 13/12 WED Recording start time Recording end time CHANNEL / â REC MODE HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR PREV NEXT TIMER REC îÂÂî WED 13/12 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 SP OK Date Start Stop CH Mode Confirm Timer Recording New Input DVD Remain 1h20m (SP) 1/1 RL_s Singapore.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 47 En ⢠You can also clear a timer program before itâÂÂs started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . 2 Select âÂÂNew Inputâ to set a new timer program, then press ENTER. 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a field; use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value. ⢠Date â Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly program. ⢠Start â Set the recording start time. ⢠Stop â Set the recording end time (maximum length of a timer recording is six hours). ⢠CH â Choose a channel (1âÂÂ99, excluding skip channels), or one of the external inputs from which to record. ⢠Mode â Select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 42). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Ttl Name Input â Optionally, you can enter a name for the recording up to 32 characters. (Highlight Program Set then press î (cursor down) to access this option.) 4 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight âÂÂProgram setâ and press ENTER. The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer program you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: ⢠If there are already the maximum number of titles or chapters on the disc, the message Title Over or Data Over appears. (There can be up to 99 titles on a disc.) ⢠If a timer program overlaps another in the list, the message Overlap appears. ⢠If no recordable disc is loaded, the message CanâÂÂt Rec appears. ⢠Standby is displayed when the recorder is in timer recording standby. ⢠Recording is displayed when a timer recording is in progress. 5 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME MENU. Note ⢠The rightmost column in the timer recording screen ( Confirm ) shows whether thereâÂÂs enough space to record your timer program. If you selected a daily or weekly program, the date of the last recording that will fit on the disc appears (up to a maximum of one month ahead). ⢠If the timer program is too long to fit into the available disc space, the message Time Over appears. The program will record until the disc is full. ⢠If Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 83) is set to On , the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the program is too long even when recorded in EP (extended play), the message Time Over appears. Timer recording using the G-Code⢠programming system This system makes programming timer recordings very simple. Most TV guides publish G-Code programming numbers with their program details. If you want to make a timer recording of a program, you just input the corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell the recorder the recording mode, and whether itâÂÂs a once-only recording or a regular recording. Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode SUN 12/12 10 00 11 00 Pr 7 SP Timer Recording Ttl Name Input Program Set HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR REC MODE îÂÂî G- CODE RL_s Singapore.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 48 En 1 Press âÂÂG-Codeâ to display the G-Code program screen. You can also access this screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then G- Code ). ⢠Use the number buttons to enter the G-Code programming number. (To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR .) ⢠Press REC MODE to select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 42). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Once , Daily or Weekly recording option. 2 After making the settings, press ENTER. The program details are shown at the bottom of the screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically exited. ⢠If you havenâÂÂt set up the guide channels (or at least the guide channel for the number that you entered), the recorder will prompt you to enter the channel number that the TV program is showing on. Tip ⢠You can check the timer program settings by pressing TIMER REC to display the timer recording screen. G-Code programming with the power off You can enter a G-Code programming number when the recorder is in standby. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature until you have set up the guide channels. See G-Code CH Setting on page 77. ⢠You canâÂÂt change the recording mode. ⢠You canâÂÂt program daily or weekly timer recordings. 1 Press âÂÂG-CodeâÂÂ. The front panel display shows the current recording mode and prompts you to enter the G-Code programming number. 2 Use the number buttons to enter the number. ⢠To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR . 3 Press ENTER. The display shows the timer settings: Date î Start time î End time î Recording channel. ⢠If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that the number is correct and that the guide channel is set (see G-Code CH Setting on page 77), then set the timer recording again. ⢠If CANâÂÂT SET appears in the display, it means that although you entered a valid number, the program has already finished. Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time in two different ways. This can be useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example. to input 3 9 9 2 4 09 G-Code# Rec Mode Rec Times G-Code MN21 Once Daily Weekly REC MODE to change to change level to change ENTER CLEAR G- CODE G- C O D E 29 3 24 HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR REC PREV NEXT STOP REC TIMER REC î RL_s Singapore.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 49 En Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. The timer indicator disappears from the front panel display. 2 Press î REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute increments. Programming a new end time 1 During timer recording, press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). 2 Use the î (cursor up) button to highlight the current timer recording (âÂÂRecordingâ is shown in the âÂÂConfirmâ column), then press ENTER. A screen showing details of the timer recording appears. From this screen, only the recording stop time can be changed. 3 Set a new Stop time for the timer recording. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the hour or minute field, then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the time. 4 Press ENTER to set the new time and exit the screen. Recording will continue until the new stop time is reached. Canceling and stopping a timer recording in progress After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the program (but continue recording), or stop recording completely if you need to. 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator disappears); recording continues so that you can manually stop recording whenever you like. 2 When you want to stop recording completely, press î STOP REC. Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. 1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 Press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCK . If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again. ⢠To unlock the recorder, press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK . ⢠To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then press and hold î REC for three seconds. New Input WED 13/12 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 SP Recording Date Start Stop CH Mode Confirm Timer Recording DVD Remain 1h20m (SP) 1/1 Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode TUE 12/12 10 00 11 00 Pr 7 SP Timer Recording Program Set Ttl Name Input REC ST OP REC î RL_s Singapore.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 50 En Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions ⢠Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesnâÂÂt start recording! Check that the disc loaded is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 68), and that there are fewer than 99 titles already on the DVD. ⢠The recorder wonâÂÂt let me enter a timer program! Why not? You canâÂÂt enter a timer program if the clock isnâÂÂt set. ⢠What happens when two or more timer programs overlap? Basically, the program with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the program with the later start time after the earlier program is finished. If two programs have the same times (but different channels, for example), the program set most recently takes priority. â¢I entered a timer program, but the recorder doesnâÂÂt confirm whether or not itâÂÂs OK. Why not? Timer confirmation only works for DVD recordings when there is a recordable disc loaded. Also make sure that the disc is not locked (see Lock Disc on page 68) and that there are fewer than 99 titles already recorded. Note that itâÂÂs possible that although the timer recording screen says OK , the recording doesnâÂÂt complete successfully because of some other reason, such as a damaged disc, etc. Simultaneous recording and playback A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a recording in progress from the start of the recording (as in, playback is âÂÂchasingâ the recording). For example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start watching the movie, from the beginning, while the recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you. In fact, youâÂÂre not just limited to watching the recording in progress; you can watch anything else already on the DVD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs on page 34). Important ⢠Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature. ⢠You may not be able to use this feature with a DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another recorder. ⢠During recording, press î PLAY to start playback from the beginning of the current recording, or press DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play from there. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. ⢠To stop playback, press î STOP (recording will continue). ⢠To stop recording, press î STOP REC (playback will continue). Note ⢠You canâÂÂt start playback immediately after recording starts. ⢠When scanning, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording (see Scanning discs on page 35). ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature during Auto Start Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display). VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 51 En Recording from an external component You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorderâÂÂs external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options. 2 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. There are three analog inputs. The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: ⢠L1 â Input 1/Auto Start Rec ⢠L2 â Input 2 (front panel) ⢠L3 â Input 3 Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio , Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In settings on page 79). ⢠If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 43 for detailed information. 4 Press î REC when youâÂÂre ready to start recording. Note ⢠If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 43 for more details. Automatic recording from a satellite tuner If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top box connected to the L1 input, you can have the recorder start and stop recording automatically with the timer settings of the connected component. (If the other component doesnâÂÂt have a built-in timer, youâÂÂll need to use it with an external timer unit.) After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder starts recording when it detects a signal from the other component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops recording. If you want to use this recorder with the timer features of your satellite tuner, see Language code list on page 92. Important ⢠It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear this in mind when setting the timer. ⢠If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if another timer recording is in progress. ⢠Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer recording is due to start. After the timer recording has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume. 1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other component), then switch it into standby (if necessary). Check the manual that came with the receiver if youâÂÂre not sure how to do this. 2 Load a recordable disc into this recorder. 3 Check that the âÂÂAudio Inâ settings for âÂÂExternal Audioâ and âÂÂBilingual Recordingâ are as you want them. See Audio In settings on page 79 for more on these settings. VR mode Video mode INPUT SELECT ENTER CLEAR REC REC MODE î î îÂÂî VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 52 En 4 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 43 for detailed information. 5 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto Start RecordingâÂÂ. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or âÂÂNoâ to switch off. 7 Switch the recorder into standby. The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights. The recorder will automatically switch on and start recording when the other component comes on. Recording stops when the external component switches off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording, press î STANDBY/ ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO indicator goes off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has already started, press î REC for three seconds, then î STOP REC . ⢠When a timer recording is in progress ahead of Auto Start Recording, some functions, such as extending the timer recording and chase play, are not available. Press the front panel button for three seconds to cancel Auto Start Recording without affecting the timer recording. The AUTO indicator goes off. Note ⢠You canâÂÂt set Auto Start Recording when: ⢠the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby. ⢠there is no recordable disc loaded. ⢠the disc loaded is locked. ⢠the disc loaded already contains the maximum number of titles (99). Playing your recordings on other DVD players Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it canâÂÂt be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 68 before starting the steps below. Important ⢠Once youâÂÂve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode, you canâÂÂt edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe âÂÂundoneâÂÂ; see Undo Finalize on page 69 for how to do this. â¢A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. VR mode Video mode VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 53 En 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ from the finalize options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 5 For Video mode discs only, select a title menu style, then select âÂÂYesâ to start finalization or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the âÂÂtop menuâ is selected on any DVD player. ⢠Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 6 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: ⢠If the finalization process is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. ⢠How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes. Note ⢠If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initializing a DVD-RW disc When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will initialize it automatically for recording. You can also manually initialize DVD-RW discs. You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording. Important ⢠Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! ⢠You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂInitializeâ 3 Select âÂÂVideo Modeâ or âÂÂVR Modeâ from the initialize options. 4 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc. Note ⢠By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 83 if you want to change the default to Video mode. ⢠If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. Finalize Undo Finalize Next Screen Start Disc Setup Basic Initialize Finalize T I T L E M E N U TITLE MENU Finalize DVD-RW VR Mode Video Mode Start Start Basic Initialize Finalize Disc Setup Initializing Disc 1 min left Pr 1 RL_s Singapore.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 54 En Chapter 7 Editing Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs . The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD , and whether youâÂÂre editing Original content, or a Play List. With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible. There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesnâÂÂt actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players). The Disc Navigator screen 1 Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. Video Mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Recording Time 0h30m40s Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Edit mode Disc Navigat or menu options Disc recording mode Number of title pages Locked title indicator Information f or selected title Recording time av ailable in the displayed recording mode Currently selected title RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR PREV PLAY NEXT Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) RL_s Singapore.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 55 En ⢠You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Disc Navigator then press ENTER ). ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more than six titles/ nine chapters. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator screens. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc Navigator. 2 To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU . Remember ⢠You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles using the NAVI MARK buttonâÂÂsee Changing the thumbnail picture for a title on page 34. Disc Navigator menu options The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the VR mode and Video mode discs are shown below. ⢠Play â Play a title (page 56) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 56) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 59) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 56) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 59) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 59) (Original) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 56) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 56) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 59) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 56) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 59) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 59) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a title (page 57) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 58) (Play List) ⢠Create â Make a new Play List title (page 62) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a Play List title (page 61) ⢠Move â Move the position of a title in the Play List (page 63) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles in the Play List (page 64) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 64) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 60) ⢠Erase â Erase a title from the Play List (page 60) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title in the Play List (page 60) ⢠Combine â Combine two Play List titles into one (page 63) ⢠Divide â Divide a Play List title into two (page 63) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 62) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Playlist / Original indicator Video mode VR mode VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 56 En Editing VR mode Original and Video mode content These commands affect the actual content stored on the DVD-R/RW. Remember ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original screen. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to play, then press ENTER or î PLAY. Playback of the title you selected starts. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls for the Play function: Press DISC NAVIGATOR , then use the / â buttons to select a title. Press î PLAY to start playback. Erase The Erase title command does slightly different things depending on what you are currently editing. If you are editing Original content on a VR mode disc the title will be erased from the disc and the available recording time will increase accordingly. If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title will disappear from the list of titles, but the available recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Tip ⢠You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER . (You can also use this method to erase titles when using the Play function, above.) Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode recordings and 32 characters for Video mode recordings. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to the name input screen. 3 Input a name for the selected title. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. VR mode Video mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode Original DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Video mode Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP RL_s Singapore.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 57 En â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name below. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâ then press ENTER to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R ), press î to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. *1 lower-case: ÿ; upper -case: àChapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER. After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below). ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER (see also the note below) Key Characters Key Characters 1 . , â ? ! â & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ 2 a b c 2 ä àá â ã æ ç 7 p q r s 7 $ ÿ/à*1 3 d e f 3 è é ë ê 8 t u v 8 ü ù û ú 4 g h i 4 î ï ì àá 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 ã 0 0 î [cursor back] î [cursor forward] îÂÂ/ î [change case] CLEAR [clear character] î <space> î [ï¬Ânish name input] G- Code ~ ( ) _ / : ; â ` ^ @ # â % ÃÂ¥ | = { } [ ] < > VR mode Original DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Preview Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Original Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 RL_s Singapore.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 58 En ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command (only works with VR mode disc edits). 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. Note ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. ⢠It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. Inserting chapter markers into a title You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP MARK button while playing the title or during recording. This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content but also for editing purposes. 1 Start playback of the title you want to create new chapter markers in. You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator menu to do this. 2 Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a new chapter to begin. A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted: ⢠For greater control over the exact position of chapter markers it can be useful to use the î PAUSE button and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse controls ( îÂÂ/î ). Note ⢠You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start Recording. ⢠If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder automatically starts a new chapter when you restart the recording. ⢠When recording in Video mode, the recorder automatically puts chapter markers in at regular intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter markers manually after recording (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 83). ⢠The Play List and Original content on a disc can each contain up to 999 chapters. Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of an Original title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. VR mode CHP MARK PA USE î î VR mode Original Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-1 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B RL_s Singapore.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 59 En 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Lock / Unlock You can lock a title so that it canâÂÂt be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also canâÂÂt undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. 1 Select âÂÂLockâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock. Erase All This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock / Unlock on page 59). 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo a Lock command. î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B VR mode Video mode Original 1/1 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Video mode Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Ye s N o VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 60 En ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Creating and editing a VR mode Play List A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual (Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video content on the disc, and it allows greater control over editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you want it. Remember ⢠Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List edit screen. ⢠The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to play, then press ENTER. Playback of the title you selected starts. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls for the Play function: Press DISC NAVIGATOR , then use the / â buttons to select a title. Press î PLAY to start playback. Erase This command erases a title only from the Play List. The title remains in the Original content and the available recording time does not increase. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Note ⢠The remaining recording time doesnâÂÂt change when you erase something from the Play List. Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to name, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the selected title. Press ENTER after selecting each character. VR mode VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP RL_s Singapore.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 61 En â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 57. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâÂÂ, then press ENTER to fix the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, moving, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER . After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER . ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Select the dividing line between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER . ⢠Move â Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you want to move, press ENTER , then highlight the new location for it, then press ENTER again. ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command. 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. VR mode DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Move Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Play List Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 RL_s Singapore.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 62 En Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Create Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List. When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List (you can erase bits you donâÂÂt need laterâÂÂsee Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) on page 61). The title appears in the Play List complete with the chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these are not automatically copied over into the Play List title. You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂCreateâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER. If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not apply. 3 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select an Original title to put into the Play List. VR mode Play List Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-2 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1 2 Play List 1/1 Undo DVD ORG1 ORG4 ORG2 ORG3 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) RL_s Singapore.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 63 En 4 Press ENTER to add the title. The new title appears in the updated Play List. 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another location for a new title. Move Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to move, then press ENTER. 3 Select a new position in the Play List for the title, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to move. Divide Use this command to split a title up into two new titles. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that you want to divide, then press ENTER. 3 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 To return to the Disc Navigator menu options, select âÂÂBackâ and press ENTER . Combine Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles into one. 1 Select âÂÂCombineâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Highlight the bar divider between the two titles you want to combine, then press ENTER. Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 1 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 2 3 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-1 0.00.08.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) RL_s Singapore.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 64 En After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or continue combining more titles. Erase All This command erases all the titles from the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo a Lock command. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Ye s N o Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Disc History 08 65 En Chapter 8 Disc History The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded. It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode and the lock status of the disc. Using the Disc History 1 Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History screen. The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc loaded, it is shown in the list with a âÂÂdisc inâ icon. ⢠The Disc History screen is also accessible from the Home Menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to see title information for other discs in the list. ⢠To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you canâÂÂt remove the currently loaded disc). ⢠You can see the available recording time for different recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button. 3 To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME MENU or DISC HISTORY. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls to navigate the Disc History screen: Press DISC HISTORY , then use the / â buttons to move up and down the list. Note ⢠When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is a number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you want to (see Input Disc Name on page 68). ⢠When you change the display for the available recording time using the REC MODE button, only the display is changed; the actual recording mode is not affected. ⢠The following discs appear in the Disc History list in gray: â Discs with no available recording space left â Locked discs â Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or 999 chapters â Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to the recorderâÂÂs current setting. ⢠When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information for that disc disappears from the Disc History. VR mode Video mode Disc History LP DVD Remain Disc Name Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 T oday's Football Enjoy Golf! Social dance Lesson Titles : 8 DVD-RW VR 625 System News Sport T ravel Movie Music 1h54m 2h35m 1h22m 0h30m 1h38m 1/2 Disc name Disc lock indicator Recorded Line Sy stem of disc Av ailable recording space Recording time av ailable Recording mode Number of titles on disc Disc type and recording mode Title information for the selected disc Disc loaded Other discs Selec ted disc RL_s Singapore.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 9 66 En Chapter 9 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV. Playing a slideshow 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ to display the PhotoViewer screen. ⢠The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc containing JPEG files is loaded. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a folder from the folder list. The first nine images from the selected folder are displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen. 3 Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area. The first thumbnail image is highlighted. ⢠To get back to the folder list, press RETURN . 4 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a thumbnail. ⢠Use the î and î buttons to display the previous/ next page of thumbnails. 5 Press ENTER or î PLAY to start playing a slideshow from the selected thumbnail. ⢠Use the î PREV / NEXT î buttons to display the previous/next picture, or the î PAUSE button to pause the slideshow. 6 Press î STOP or RETURN to return to the thumbnail view area. 7 To return to the folder view area, press RETURN. ⢠To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see below). ⢠The time it takes for the recorder to load a file increases with large file sizes. ⢠Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or either side (depending on the picture). ⢠If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 10). Reloading files from a disc If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Use the î (cursor down) button to navigate to the last entry in the folder list (âÂÂRead next: ...âÂÂ). 2 Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc. It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the images. PhotoViewer 1/2 1/3 01. 12/12 TUE 02. 13/12 WED 03. 14/12 THU 04. 15/12 FRI 05. 16/12 SA T 06. 17/12 SUN 07. 18/12 MON 08. 19/12 TUE 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 File Date/Time Chair No. 2 10:00 12/05/2003 Size 1920 x 1440 Currently selected thumbnail File information Pages in file view Pages in folder list Currently selected folder in folder list RL_s Singapore.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 9 67 En Note ⢠You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.) Zooming the screen During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL button to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to move the zoomed area within the picture. Rotating the screen You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ⢠During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90ú. Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90ú. 2x Zoom î î RL_s Singapore.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 10 68 En Chapter 10 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu: ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. Basic settings Input Disc Name When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 1 Select âÂÂInput Disc Nameâ from the Basic options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 57. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. Note ⢠You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Lock Disc ⢠Default setting: Off Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off . Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode VR mode Video mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc Next Screen Disc Setup Input Disc Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø D ISC7 VR mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc On Off Disc Setup RL_s Singapore.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 10 69 En Important â¢A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). Note ⢠You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initialize settings You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode recording or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 83). The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for example if you want to change the recording format of the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 53 for detailed instructions. Finalize settings Finalize Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 52 for detailed instructions. Undo Finalize You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 From the Disc Setup menu, select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ, then âÂÂUndo Finalizeâ from the finalize options. 2 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. Note ⢠You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-RW DVD-RW RL_s Singapore.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 11 70 En Chapter 11 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. Choosing a preset 1 With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the preset. ⢠Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: ⢠Tuner â suitable for general TV broadcasts ⢠VCR â suitable for video cassettes ⢠LDP â suitable for Laserdiscs ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VCR or LDP ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠3-D Y/C â Adjusts the brightness/color separation (NTSC video only). ⢠VNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied to the video signal. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White AGC â Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colors appear. Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode T uner Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Off Max Off Detail White AGC Black Setup Motion Still 3-D Y/C VNR Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Pr 5 0 IRE On RL_s Singapore.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 11 71 En 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Note ⢠When White AGC is On , the White Level setting canâÂÂt be adjusted. ⢠The 3-D Y/C and Black Setup settings apply only to NTSC video input. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the setting. There are six presets available: ⢠TV(CRT) â suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs ⢠PDP â suitable for plasma display screens ⢠Professional â suitable for professional monitors ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV(CRT) , PDP or Professional ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Move the cursor down and select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠Pure Cinema â When watching DVD movies, Pure Cinema optimizes the picture quality. If the picture appears unnatural on the default Auto setting, change to On or Off as desired. (Note that this setting can only be adjusted when the video output is set to progressive.) See also PureCinema in the Glossary on page 97. ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component (has no effect when the video output is set to progressive). ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (color) component (has no effect when the video output is set to progressive). ⢠QNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colors appear. TV(CRT) Detailed Settings Memory1 Detailed Settings Memory1 Off Max Off Max Off Max YNR CNR QNR Off Max Detail Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Pure Cinema Auto RL_s Singapore.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 11 72 En 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Note ⢠The Black Setup setting applies only when playing NTSC discs. Audio DRC ⢠Default setting: Off When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose low level sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. 1 During playback or when paused, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂAudio AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust DRC from âÂÂOffâ to âÂÂMaxâÂÂ. Exactly how much difference you can hear between the settings will depend on the material. Remember ⢠Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital . In this case adjust the dynamic range from your AV amplifier/receiver. Off Max Audio DRC Audio Adjust RL_s Singapore.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 73 En Chapter 12 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SetupâÂÂ. ⢠Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. ⢠Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. Note ⢠Some of the Initial Setup menu screens shown in this section vary slightly depending on the country or region of purchase. Basic settings Clock Setting The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before you can use any of the timer recording features. The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast station transmitting clock signals, or manually. Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to display the clock setting screen. Use the Display option to set the date and time format (12 or 24-hour clock, etc.) ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually: ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set your time zone, then press ENTER . ⢠Press î (cursor down) then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set summertime On or Off , then press ENTER . Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Auto Manual Display Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Initial Setup Start Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 Singapore Singapore Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 74 En ⢠Set the current date and time. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠Display options From this screen you can choose how you want the date and time to be displayed. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set the date format. ⢠Press î (cursor down) then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set the clock format. Note ⢠When you use the Setup Navigator, the date and time formats will be reset to the default for your country/ region. Input Line System ⢠Default setting: 625 System For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input line system to 625 System . When recording an NTSC or PALâÂÂ60 signal through an external input, change to 525 System . Note ⢠If when this setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel button then pressing DISC NAVIGATOR (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. ⢠You canâÂÂt mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. ⢠When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see Input Colour System on page 77). ⢠Changing the tuner country setting in the Setup Navigator or using the Auto or Manual Channel Setting functions may change the Input Line System setting. On Screen Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen operation displays ( Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off to hide these displays. Front Panel Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to Off to have the front panel display switch off completely when in standby. Note ⢠When set to Off , the display still lights dimly in standby when setting a timer recording, or during Auto Start Recording. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 Singapore Singapore Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Date & Time Display 15:00 Wed 15/ 12/ 2004 Date Format Clock Format day / month / year 24Hour 0:00-23:59 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator 525System 625System Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 75 En Power Save ⢠Default setting: Off When set to Off , signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN terminal are passed through to the ANTENNA OUT terminal when the recorder is in standby. You can cut the standby power consumption of the recorder by turning off the through function for one or both terminals: ⢠On â No through function for the antenna terminal ⢠Off â Through function for the antenna terminal Remote Control Set ⢠Default setting: Recorder1 You only need to set this if you are using more than one Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room. So that each remote control operates only its own recorder, make this setting different for each recorder and remote in the room. There are three different recorder IDs. When set to Recorder2 or Recorder3 , the remote control mode is shown in the front panel display. After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the change by selecting Yes or No (use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER . Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote to the same ID. To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ) until the indicator on the remote lights. Setup Navigator ⢠Default setting: n/a The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings menu should you need it at any other time. See also Switching on and setting up on page 23. Tuner settings Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/ G, PAL-1, SECAM D/K and NTSC M/N programs off the air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip (described below). 1 Choose âÂÂTunerâ from the Initial Setup menu, then âÂÂAuto Channel SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Select your country then press ENTER to start tuning. ⢠You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by pressing ENTER again. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Recorder1 Recorder2 Recorder3 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Initial Setup Next Screen Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Auto Channel Setting Auto Channel Setting Country Singapore Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 76 En After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit this screen. Note ⢠You can fine-tune individual stations using the Manual CH Setting feature. See Manual CH Setting below for how to use this. Manual CH Setting The channel skip function lets you skip channels where there is no station so that as you change channels using the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons, you only change to channels that have a station. The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune to stations, should you need to. 1 Select âÂÂManual CH SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen. 2 Select your country. 3 Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting screen. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons to change channels. From this screen there are eight parameters you can set: ⢠Skip â If you want to skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On . ⢠CH System â Set the channel system used in your area or region. ⢠Channel â Change the channel number assigned to the current preset. ⢠AFT (Auto Fine Tune) â When set to On , the station is automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune (see below). ⢠Level â Set the AFT level (see above). ⢠Sound System â Set the sound system used for the current channel. ⢠Name â Move the cursor right then input a name for the current station, (up to five characters) then press ENTER . Channel Swapping The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel assignments of different programs. This is so that you can group together station presets which naturally go together. 1 Select âÂÂChannel SwappingâÂÂ. Pr System CH Name 1 B/G 26 2 B/G 33 3 B/G 23 4 B/G 30 5 B/G 37 6 B/G 35 7 B/G 39 8 B/G 26 Pr System CH Name 9 B/G 9 10 B/G 25 11 B/G 11 12 B/G 12 13 B/G 13 14 B/G 14 15 B/G 15 16 B/G 16 Initial Setup 1/7 Channel Mapping Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Manual Channel Setting Manual Channel Setting Country Singapore Initial Setup Skip CH System Channel AFT Level Sound System Name Pr 1 Off Western Euro 2 On B/G Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Next Screen Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 77 En 2 Select âÂÂNext Screenâ to go to the swap presets screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a preset station to swap. ⢠Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/ next page. 4 Press î (cursor right), then select a preset station to swap with the first preset. 5 Press ENTER to swap the presets. 6 If you want to swap more presets, press î (cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5. 7 Press HOME MENU to finish and exit. G-Code CH Setting ⢠Default setting: n/a Guide channels are used by the G-Code system so that the channel number specified in the G-Code programming numbers can be guaranteed to correspond to the correct station. 1 Select âÂÂG-Code CH SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as necessary. Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the guide channel for setting. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the channel number. ⢠Use the PREV / NEXT button to display the previous/ next 10 guide channels. 3 To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER. Video In / Out settings Input Colour System ⢠Default setting: Auto On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PALâÂÂ60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it manually if the picture is not displayed properly. 11 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 51 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 53 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting G-Code CH Setting G-Code CH Setting Guide Preset Guide Preset 1/26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System Component Video NTSC on P AL TV Next Screen Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 78 En 1 Select âÂÂInput Colour SystemâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner and the external inputs. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the input colour system for the current input or built-in tuner. ⢠The available settings depend on the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 74). The table below shows the different options available. Component Video Out ⢠Default setting: Interlace You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to your TV using the component video jacks. If your TV is compatible with progressive-scan component video, set this Progressive for the highest quality picture. If your TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video, leave it set to Interlace . See also Progressive scan video in the glossary on page 97. Important If you switch to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the button on the front panel, then press DISC HISTORY . This will set the recorderâÂÂs video output back to Interlace . NTSC on PAL TV ⢠Default setting: Off When set to On , NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example) will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your TV is already NTSC-compatible. Depending on this setting and the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 74), the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. Note ⢠Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if youâÂÂre not sure whether yours has this feature. Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 Auto Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System Component Video NTSC on P AL TV Next Screen Initial Setup Compatibility of this unit with progressive-scan TVs Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the âÂÂstandard definitionâ output ( Interlace ). If there are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model, please contact our customer service center. This recorder is compatible with the following Pioneer displays and monitors Plasma display ⢠PDP-503HDG, PDP-433HDG, PDP-504HDG, PDP-434HDG Input Line System NTSC on P AL TV Output when stopped 625 System Off PAL On PAL 525 System Off NTSC On PALâÂÂ60 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System Component Video NTSC on P AL TV On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 79 En Audio In settings NICAM Select ⢠Default setting: NICAM If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV broadcast, select Regular Audio , otherwise set to NICAM . (When set to NICAM , you can still select Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing audio channels on page 27.) Tuner Level ⢠Default setting: Normal Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessively high causing distortion. External Audio ⢠Default setting: Stereo If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to Stereo . If each channel carries a separate soundtrack, change to Bilingual . Bilingual Recording ⢠Default setting: A/L When recording a bilingual source from an external input in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32 , you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or the B/R (right) audio channel. Note ⢠If youâÂÂre recording in VR mode (except when set to FINE/MN32 ), both channels will be recorded and you can switch them as you like on playback. Input Level (L1 / L2 / L3) ⢠Default setting: 0dB You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external input individually, from âÂÂ6dB to 6dB in steps of 3 dB to optimize the recorded audio level. Audio Out settings Digital Out ⢠Default setting: On If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio output, set this to Off , otherwise leave it On . Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) NICAM Regular Audio Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) Normal Compression Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) Stereo Bilingual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) A/L B/R Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) Initial Setup 6dB 3dB 0dB âÂÂ3 d B âÂÂ6 d B Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 80 En Note ⢠When set to Off , all the other Audio Out settings are grayed out and canâÂÂt be set. Dolby Digital Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: Dolby Digital If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital , otherwise set to Dolby Digital î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible. DTS Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: On If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On , otherwise set to Off . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is DTS compatible. Important ⢠If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/ receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠When set to On , there is no analog audio output when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out is Off ), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do not play this through your amplifier and speakers. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See Switching audio channels on page 41. 96kHz PCM Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: 96kHz î 48kHz If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96 kHz), set to 96kHz , otherwise set to 96kHz î 48kHz . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is compatible with high sampling rate audio. MPEG Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: MPEG î PCM If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG , otherwise set to MPEG î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is MPEG compatible. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital î PCM Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out 96kHz î 48kHz 96kHz Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out MPEG MPEG î PCM Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 81 En Language settings OSD Language ⢠Default setting: English This sets the language of the on-screen menus and displays. Audio Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that language (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language on page 81). Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 82). Tip ⢠You can switch between the languages recorded on a DVD disc any time during playback using the AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.) Subtitle Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language on page 81). Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 82). Tip ⢠You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE button. (This does not affect this setting.) Auto Language ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder selects the default audio language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your preferred subtitle language only if that is set to something different. In other words, movies in your native language wonâÂÂt have any subtitles, while foreign language movies will be shown with subtitles. Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly according to your Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings. For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings must be the sameâÂÂsee Audio Language on page 81 and Subtitle Language on page 81. Note ⢠Even when set to On , Auto Language may not work with some discs. In this case, set the audio and subtitle languages using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. Tip ⢠You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Chinese Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Chinese Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 82 En DVD Menu Language ⢠Default setting: w/Subtitle Language Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several languages. This setting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting for menus to appear in the same language as your Subtitle Language âÂÂsee Subtitle Language on page 81. Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 82). Subtitle Display ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder displays subtitles according to the Subtitle Language and Auto Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off altogether (although you may find that some discs override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on to some DVD discs. Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages 1 Select âÂÂOtherâ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 Select the language you want. ⢠Select by language name: Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/ right) buttons to change the language. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 92 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. 3 Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen. Recording settings Manual Recording ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting there are four different recording time/picture quality settings, FINE , SP , LP and EP . If you want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings. When recording, you can select your Manual Recording setting using the REC MODE button. 1 Select âÂÂOn (go to setup)â to display the manual recording setting screen. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the manual recording level. ⢠You can also use the î and î buttons to cycle between levels MN1 , MN9 , MN21 and MN32 . ⢠To preview the recording quality, press î (cursor down) and select Preview . To return to the level adjust screen, press ENTER . 3 Press ENTER to set the manual recording level and return to the menu screen. Note ⢠The preset picture quality settings correspond to the following manual settings: FINE : MN32 , SP : MN21 , LP : MN9 , EP : MN1 . ⢠See Language code list on page 92 for detailed information on the manual recording levels. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Chinese Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Assist Subtitle Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display DVD Menu Language DVD Menu Language English 0 514 Language Number Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. On (go to setup) Off Initial Setup Pr 5 EP LP SP FINE Preview DVD Remain 2h00m MN 9 (4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps RL_s Singapore.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 83 En Optimized Rec ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy or G-Code programming system) is set but there isnâÂÂt enough space on the disc at the recording quality set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the available disc space. Note ⢠You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the remaining time available on the disc. ⢠If, even on recording level MN 1 , there is insufficient space available on the disc, the recording is made at level MN 1 but recording will stop once the disc is full. ⢠Optimized Recording only compensates for the first (earliest starting) timer program if more than one has been set. Navi Mark ⢠Default setting: 0 seconds In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0 seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used). Auto Chapter (Video) ⢠Default setting: 10 minutes When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change this interval to 15 minutes , or switch off automatic chapter marking altogether with the No Separation setting. DVD-RW Auto Init. ⢠Default setting: VR Mode When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording. Playback settings TV Screen Size ⢠Default setting: 4:3 (Letter Box) If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 settingâ widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full screen area. When playing software recorded in conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will determine how the material is presentedâÂÂsee the manual that came with your TV for details on what options are available. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback On Off Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback 0 seconds 30 seconds 3 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback No Separation 10 minutes 15 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback VR Mode Vi deo Mode Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) 16:9 Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 84 En If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . In Letter Box mode, widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even though the picture looks larger on the screen, youâÂÂre actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and disc formats on page 88 for more information. Still Picture ⢠Default setting: Auto The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting automatically chooses the best setting each time. ⢠Field â produces a stable, generally shake-free image. ⢠Frame â produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than field stills. Seamless Playback ⢠Default setting: Off During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice momentary interruption in the picture at edited points. The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback. When switched On , you may notice that the edit points are a few frames earlier or later than you set. Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ⢠Default password: none ⢠Default Country code: us (2119) Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will require you to enter a password before the disc will play. This gives you some control about what your children watch on your DVD recorder. Some discs also support the Country code feature. The recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs depending on the Country code you set. Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country code you must set a password. As the password owner you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code whenever you like. You can also change the password. Note ⢠Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for your children use the Parental Lock feature. These discs will always play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 87), then set a new password. Parental Lock : Set Password The password you set will enable you to change the Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the password that you will need to enter if you want to play a disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder. 1 Select âÂÂSet PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to input a four-digit password. 3 Press ENTER to set the password. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Field Frame Auto Initial Setup VR mode Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Set Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Set Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 85 En Parental Lock : Change Password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂChange PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Enter a new password. 5 Press ENTER. Parental Lock : Change Level 1 Select âÂÂChange LevelâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a new parental lock level. 4 Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level. Parental Lock : Country Code You may also want to refer to the Country code list on page 92. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a Country code. There are two ways you can do this. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 5 678 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number us 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 9 Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 86 En ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to change the country code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit country code (you can find the Country code list on page 92.) 4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code. Note ⢠Changing the country code does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Angle Indicator ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on- screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen indicator. TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 87 En Chapter 13 Additional information Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Press and hold î STOP and press î STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. The LED indicator on the remote controls lights. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2 Press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/ off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Maker Code Alba 66 Bush 76 Finlux 84 Fisher 61, 65 F ujitsu 77 F unai 67 Goldstar 79 Grandiente 87 Grundig 51, 82 Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86 IT T 70 Mitsubishi 59 Nokia 53, 81 P anasonic 58, 72 Philips 57, 85 P ioneer 50, 80 RCA 68 Salora 71 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 74 Sei 78 Sharp 52 Sony 54 T andy 69 T elefunken 64 Thomson 62 T oshiba 55 Victor 63 RL_s Singapore.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 88 En Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture ï¬Âlls the whole screen. 4:3 16:9 The program appears squashed. Set to either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The program is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presentedâÂÂcheck the manual that came with the TV for details. RL_s Singapore.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 89 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 94). ⢠Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 97). No picture ⢠Check that ever ything is connected properly (page 12). ⢠Check that the connected TV and/or the A V amp/receiver is set to the correct input. ⢠The recorder may be set to progressive-scan with an incompatible TV . Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the button (front panel) then pressing DISC HISTORY (front panel). CanâÂÂt play a disc ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 94). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠There may be condensation in the recorder . Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. All settings are r eset ⢠If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. ⢠Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. Screen goes blank and contr ols are inoperative ⢠P ress î STOP then restart playback. Remote control does not work ⢠If you connected this recorder to another P ioneer product using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12). ⢠Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 75). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .) ⢠Use the remote within its operating range (page 8). ⢠Replace the batteries (page 8). No sound or sound is distorted ⢠Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. ⢠There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play . P ress î PLAY to resume regular playback. ⢠DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver . If you have connected a suitable decoder , also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On . ⢠Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog. ⢠Check the audio cable connections (page 12). ⢠If the sound is distorted, tr y cleaning the cable plugs. The picture fr om the external input is distorted ⢠If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder . Connect the component directly to your TV . RL_s Singapore.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 90 En The picture is distorted ⢠Change the Input Line System setting (page 74). (Y ou can also change it by pressing the button and DISC NAVIGATOR on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) Screen is str etched vertically or hori- zontally ⢠Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 83) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 88). ⢠If you have a widescreen TV , check its aspect ratio settings. ⢠This recorder âÂÂs input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. CanâÂÂt play a disc r ecorded using this recor der on another player ⢠If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that itâÂÂs ï¬Ânalized (page 52). â¢Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode and ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be speciï¬Âcally RW compatible in order to play it (page 9). ⢠Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non- CPRM compatible players (page 43). During playback the picture is dark or distorted ⢠When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR , the picture will not display correctly . Connect the recorder directly to your TV . CanâÂÂt contr ol your TV using this remote contr ol ⢠If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV , tr y each one in turn (page 87). ⢠It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of TV , even if the maker appears in the remote control code list. CanâÂÂt r ecord or does not r ecord suc- cessfully ⢠Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD. ⢠F or a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn âÂÂt already ï¬Ânalized. ⢠A DVD disc may contain up to 99 (Original) titles and 999 chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached. ⢠Check that the source you are tr ying to record is not copy protected. ⢠F or a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isnâÂÂt locked (page 68). ⢠Check that you are recording with the same TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system (page 74). ⢠The power may have failed during recording. Timer program doesnâ t recor d suc- cessfully ⢠When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder âÂÂs built-in TV tuner , not the TV âÂÂs built-in tuner . ⢠When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 43). ⢠T wo timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely . ⢠The power may have failed during recording. ⢠Check that the recorder âÂÂs TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) settings are the same as the channel set for recording. After brieï¬Ây unplugging or after a power failure the fr ont panel dis- play shows âÂÂ--:--â â¢ A backup batter y inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder . This batter y should last approximately ï¬Âve years from factor y shipping. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again . T o have the batter y replaced, contact your dealer or a P ioneer Ser vice Center . Front panel display shows âÂÂLOCKâ when a button is pressed ⢠The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 49). Problem Remedy RL_s Singapore.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 91 En Note ⢠If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. Frequently asked questions In this section you can find answers to frequently asked questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it can do. ⢠What kind of discs can I use for recording? You can use DVD-R and DVD-RW discs for recording. DVD-RAM, CD-R and CD-RW discs are not recordable using this recorder. See Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 9 for more details. ⢠Can I watch recordings made using this recorder on other DVD players? Yes. Use a DVD-R disc for you recordings (these are always recorded in Video mode). After recording, finalize the disc to make it playable on other DVD players (note that you cannot make further recordings on the disc after finalizing it). If you want to use a DVD-RW disc, make sure that itâÂÂs initialized for recording in Video mode. As with a DVD-R, finalize the disc after recording to make it playable in other players. See also Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 52. ⢠Can I edit recordings, or erase parts of recordings from a disc? Yes. Recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc gives you the most flexibility when editing. By default, when you load a new DVD-RW disc into the recorder it is initialized for recording in VR mode. See also Editing on page 54. ⢠Can I play a VR mode DVD-RW disc in another DVD player? Look for the âÂÂRW Compatibleâ mark on the other DVD player to see if it will play VR mode DVD-RW discs. If the player does not recognize the disc when you load it, try finalizing it in the recorder, then try again. See also Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 52. ⢠Can I record a copy-once protected program from a subscription satellite or cable channel? Yes, but youâÂÂll need to use a CPRM-compatible DVD- RW disc initialized for VR mode recording. (Look on the disc package to see if it is CPRM compatible.) See also CPRM on page 43. ⢠Can I play a disc while recording? Yes. For simultaneous recording and playback, use a 2x speed compatible DVD-RW initialized for VR mode recording (the disc should be a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or Ver. 1.2 / 4x CPRM-compatible). See also Simultaneous recording and playback on page 50. â¢I changed the batteries in the remote control and now it doesnâÂÂt work! Most likely the remote control ID does not match the recorder. After changing the batteries, the remote ID is reset to 1; if the recorder is set to something else, the remote will not work with it. See Remote Control Set on page 75 for how to set the ID of the recorder and the remote. The picture fr eezes and the front panel and remote contr ol buttons stop working ⢠P ress the front panel î STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off , then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off , press and hold î STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off . Problem Remedy RL_s Singapore.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 92 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country code list Country, Country code , Country code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us RL_s Singapore.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 93 En On-screen displays and recorder displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action ⢠Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. ⢠Incompatible region number . The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play . ⢠Cannot recor d any more titles. ⢠No more space for ï¬Âle management data. ⢠Cannot add any more chapter marks. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/ chapters or combine chapters. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. Undo the ï¬Ânal- ization. The disc was ï¬Ânalized on a non-P ioneer DVD recorder . Undo the ï¬Ânalization in order to recording/editing. ⢠Cannot play this disc. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. ⢠Cannot read the CPRM information. ⢠Could not recor d the information to the disc. ⢠Cannot edit. ⢠Could not initialize disc. ⢠Could not complete ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not undo ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. T ake out the disc, clean it and retr y . If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or some other incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. ⢠Cannot recor d to a disc that is not CPRM com- patible. ⢠Cannot recor d this content using Video mode recor ding. The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD -RW disc with CPRM for recording. ⢠This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. ⢠Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damagedâÂÂplease consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠The audio will conform to the [Bilingual Recording] setting. When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. Y ou can only record the left or right channel; not both. ⢠Operation stopped due to power failure. If during recording the power plug is disconnected from the power outlet, this message will be displayed the next time the recorder is switched on. In this case, the recording will not be recoverable. ⢠Repairing disc. This message is displayed when, due to damage or recording conditions, the recorder attempts to repair a disc. ⢠Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc. ⢠Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLA Y to clear this message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a P ioneer authorized ser vice center . RL_s Singapore.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 94 En Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD recorderâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer- authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD players are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. ⢠This channelâ s TV system is differ ent from the recor derâ s setting. The TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder . The input source has no video signal. ⢠Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLA Y to clear message. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder . ⢠Playback has stopped because the TV system is differ ent than the recor ding. During recording or timer recording standby , the TV System (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically . Message Explanation/Action RL_s Singapore.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 95 En Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat- generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if thereâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press î STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recordingâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in Linear PCM format. VR mode Video mode Level Rec. time Level Rec. time MN 1 360 mins. EP MN 1 360 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 9 240 mins. LP MN 9 240 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 21 120 mins. SP MN 21 120 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 32 61 mins. FINE MN 32 61 mins. RL_s Singapore.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 96 En Glossary Analog audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). Chapter Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See also Title . Digital audio An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to- digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . Dolby Digital 1 With multichannel audio, this high quality surround system is used in many movie theaters around the world. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DRM (Digital Rights Management) DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other WMA recording equipment) and/or software. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround system different from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format for movies. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Dynamic range The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic cinema-like effects. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A file format used for still images, such as photographs and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ or âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂ. Most digital cameras use this format. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂ. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV amp/receivers. See also PCM . MPEG video The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard. Optical digital output A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks using a special optical cord, available from specialist audio dealers. RL_s Singapore.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 97 En PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio . PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only) A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good for discs that you would normally not watch from beginning to end all at onceâÂÂkaraoke discs, for example. Progressive scan video Also called non-interlaced video, this method of displaying a picture updates all the lines in one pass, resulting in a more stable, flicker-free image than interlaced video (for a given scanning rate). PureCinema Video on a DVD disc may be either video material (originally shot on video) or film material (originally shot on film). Video material has a frame rate of 30 frames/ second, compared to 24 frames/second for film. This recorder converts film material to 60 frames/second (in progressive scan mode). PureCinema adjusts the picture so that it matches more closely the picture quality of a cinema screen. You can see whether video on a DVD disc is film or video material by displaying the transfer rate. If a âÂÂ#â appears above the transfer rate display, it is film material. Regions (DVD only) (example region code marks) Regions associate discs and players with particular areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality, but the more digital information is generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples (measurements) per second. See also Digital audio . Title A collection of chapters on a DVD disc. See also Chapter . Track Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also Chapter . WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâ or âÂÂ.WMAâÂÂ. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 4 3 ALL RL_s Singapore.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 98 En Specifications General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, Video-CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA) Power requirements . . . . . . . 110âÂÂ127 / 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 W Power consumption in standby mode 0.68 W (Front panel display: off) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 339 (D) mm Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5ðC to 35ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 85% (no condensation) TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC Recording Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording DVD-VIDEO Recordable discs DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc) DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc) Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz Compression format . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1âÂÂ6 hours Tuner Receivable channels Timer Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs Clock . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (12-hour/24-hour digital display) Power off memory . . . . Approx. 5 years (after manufacture) Input/Output VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(IEC connector) Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 3 (rear), 2 (front) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN Component video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 ⦠) PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R Input level VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM M/N - BTSC Channel E2 - E4 X - Z E5 - E12 S1 - S20 M1 - M10 U1 - U10 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 47 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel A - C X - Z D - J 11, 13 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 44 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz P AL B/G P AL I Channel 2 - 4 5 - 10 B - Q S21 - S41 21 - 69 Frequency 49 - 65 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 300 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel R1 - R5 R6 - R12 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 49 - 94 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz SECAM D/K NTSC M/N RL_s Singapore.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 99 En During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 L/R During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating Instructions Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. RL_s Singapore.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002E P ublished by P ioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 P ioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. <VRB1336-A> P rinted in China RL_s Singapore.book 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT W ARNING: The apparatus is not waterproofs, to prevent fir e or shocks hazard, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture and do not put any water source near this apparatus, such as vase, flower pot, cosmetics container and medicine bottle etc. D3-4-2-1-3_En CAUTION This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. D3-4-2-1-8_En The ST ANDBY/ON switch is secondar y connected and therefore, does not separate the unit from mains power in ST ANDBY position. Therefore install the unit suitable places easy to disconnect the MAINS plug in case of the accident. The MAINS plug of unit should be unplugged from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time. D3-4-2-2-2a_En W ARNING: BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULL Y . The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_En RL_s Singapore.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
W ARNING: No naked flame sources, such as lighted candle, should be placed on the apparatus. If naked flame sources accidentally fall down, fir e spread over the apparatus then may cause fir e. D3-4-2-1-7a_En VENTILA TION: When installing this unit, make sure to leave space ar ound the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensur e reliable operation of the product and to pr otect it from overheating, to prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. D3-4-2-1-7b_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC â 35 úC ( 41 úF â 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ⢠Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ⢠Location exposed to high humidity , or poorly ventilated location D3-4-2-1-7c_En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En This pr oduct includes F ontAv enue î fonts licenced b y NEC corpor ation. F ontAvenue is a r egist er ed tr ademark of NEC Corpor ation. POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En RL_s Singapore.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9 02 Connecting up Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Using other types of video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) . . . 15 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) . . . 16 Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 04 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Making your first recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 30 05 Playback Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Navigating discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Switching DVD soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 06 Recording About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Recording time and picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 43 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 51 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 51 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 52 Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 07 Editing The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Editing VR mode Original and Video mode content .5 6 Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . . 60 08 Disc History Using the Disc History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 09 The PhotoViewer Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 10 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 11 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . . 71 Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 12 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 RL_s Singapore.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Recording settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Playback settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 13 Additional information Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . 87 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . . 93 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 RL_s Singapore.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features ⢠Chase play Using chase play you can start watching a recording before the recording has finished. For example, you could set a timer recording for a program that youâÂÂre going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead of you. ⢠Simultaneous recording and playback This feature allows you to record a broadcast program while watching something else already recorded on the same disc. ⢠Disc Navigator The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way around the contents of a disc easy. For recordable DVD content, moving thumbnail images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator is also where you can edit recordable DVD content. ⢠Disc History The Disc History screen shows disc information, including how much free space remains for recording, for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder. Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is automatically updated with the latest information. ⢠Home Menu The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the recorderâÂÂs features in one convenient place, from setting up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and editing a recording. ⢠Progressive scan-compatible Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan effectively doubles the amount of video information fed to your TV or monitor. The result is a stable, flicker-free image. (Check your TV/monitor for compatibility with this feature.) ⢠Cinema surround sound in your home Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS- compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs. ⢠Easy Timer Recording Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to record and the recording quality, then graphically set the start and end times of the recording. ThatâÂÂs it! ⢠Program up to 32 timer recordings You can program the recorder to record up to 32 programs, up to a month in advance, using the G-Code⢠system * for easy programming if you want. As well as single programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings, too. * G-Code is registered in at least the following countries: Australia, China, Hong Kong, Japan, New Zealand, South Korea, Taiwan and Singapore. The G-Code system is manufactured under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. ⢠One Touch Recording Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the î REC button, the recording time is extended by another 30 minutes. ⢠Optimized recording Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc with the settings that you made. ⢠Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or other set top box With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC inputs of this recorder, you can start and stop recording automatically according to the timer settings of the set top box. ⢠High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio When recording using one of the high quality record settings ( FINE or MN32 ), the audio is recorded in uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers great sounding audio to accompany the high picture quality. ⢠Picture quality adjustment features During playback, you can adjust various picture quality settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the recording picture quality. For example, if you want to make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize the picture quality before transferring it to disc. ⢠Find what you want to watch quickly and easily Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc by title, chapter or time. VR mode VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 7 En ⢠Manual recording In addition to the four preset recording quality modes ( FINE , SP , LP and EP ), the manual recording mode allows you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings, giving you precise control over the recording. ⢠Safe, non-destructive editing When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited version (the Play List content) just points to various parts of the Original content. ⢠Chapter marking You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your recordings for easy editing. ⢠Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD player Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible with DVD-Video playback * . * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. ⢠WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs. VR mode VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it. ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) ⢠RF antenna cable ⢠Power cable ⢠These operating instructions Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. 3 Close the cover. Note Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of batteries togetherâ although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control Set on page 75 and Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 87 to reset them. ⢠Use within the operating range and angle, as shown. ⢠You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component using the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 12 for more information. 30 30 7m RL_s Singapore.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En Disc / content format playback compatibility General disc compatibility This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable formatâÂÂsee below for further compatibility information. ⢠Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD ⢠is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. This recorder also supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. DVD-R/RW compatibility This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs. Compatible media: ⢠DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x ⢠DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x Recording formats: ⢠DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode) ⢠DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD- Video format (Video mode) Older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. To share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs. The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorder compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs 1 . 1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. 2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. 3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. CD-R/RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. ⢠Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD) ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) ⢠Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended) ⢠Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No (see also DRM in the Glossary on page 96) ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable) DVD-Video DVD-R DVD-RW Video CD Fujicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW VIDEO CD Su per Video CD (Super VCD) Model Playable Recordable DVR-7000 Yes 1,2,3 No DVR-310/ DVR-510H Yes 1 No RL_s Singapore.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility The Windows Media î logo printed on the box indicates that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media î Player version 7, 7.1, Windows Media î Player for Windows î XP, or Windows Media î Player 9 Series. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files * File format used by digital still cameras ⢠Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0 ⢠Horizontal resolution: 160 â 5120 pixels ⢠Vertical resolution: 120 â 3840 pixels ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Frequently asked questions ⢠WhatâÂÂs the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW? The most important difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium, while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium. You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc approximately 1,000 times. For more information, see About DVD recording on page 42. ⢠WhatâÂÂs VR mode? VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible editing of recorded material compared to âÂÂVideo modeâÂÂ. On the other hand, Video mode discs are more compatible with other DVD players. ⢠Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player? Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded in Video mode * are playable in a regular DVD player, but they must be âÂÂfinalizedâ first. This process fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs. DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in some players. This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device. Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs recorded using this recorder will play on other players. * âÂÂDVD-Video formatâ recording: The use of the DVD- Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in âÂÂVideo modeâ on PioneerâÂÂs DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD- RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format. Note: âÂÂFinalizationâ is required. This recorder supports the recording of âÂÂcopy-onceâ broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection system (see CPRM on page 43) on CPRM-compliant DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. RL_s Singapore.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 11 En ⢠Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of editing can I do? Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making a âÂÂPlay Listâ of what to play and when to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the Play List. Throughout this manual, you will often see the words Original and Play List to refer to the actual content and the edited version. ⢠Original content refers to whatâÂÂs actually recorded on the disc. Play List content refers to the edited version of the discâÂÂhow the Original content is to be played. Original Title 1 Play List Title 2 Title 1 Title 3 Title 2 Chapt er 1 C hapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 2 Chapt er 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 RL_s Singapore.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 12 En Chapter 2 Connecting up Rear panel connections 1 VHF/UHF IN/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the VHF/UHF IN jack. The signal is passed through to the VHF/UHF OUT jack for connection to your TV. 2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input. 3 Audio/video outputs 1 and 2 Two sets of audio/video outputs (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video video) that you can use to connect TVs or monitors. 4 Audio/video inputs 1 and 3 Two sets of audio/video inputs (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video video) that you can use to connect to satellite receivers, TVs, VCR or other source component for recording. 5 CONTROL IN Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the Pioneer î mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord. 6 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT A digital audio output for connecting to an AV amp/ receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder or other equipment with optical digital input. 7 AC IN Connect to a power outlet using the supplied power cable after making all other connections. Front panel connections On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides a third audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog audio jacks. CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL A UDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 PULL-OPEN VIDEO/R/RW VIDEO S-VIDEO RL_s Singapore.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 13 En Easy connections The setup described here is a basic configuration that allows you to record TV programs on both this recorder and your VCR. When watching recordings from this recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR. Important ⢠This recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this recorder) using AV cables, as the picture from this recorder will not appear properly on your TV. ⢠Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 1 Connect your TV antenna/cable TV outlet to the VHF/UHF IN jack on this recorder. 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to connect the VHF/UHF OUT jack on this recorder to the antenna input on your VCR. ⢠If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect this recorder directly to your TV and skip the next step. 3 Use an RF antenna cable to connect the antenna output on your VCR to the antenna input on your TV. 4 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV. Use the supplied three-pin audio/video cable. It is color- coded to help you match them up (red/white for the right/ left audio connections and yellow for video in/outs). Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. 5 Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN 2 above) using a set of audio and video cables. Note ⢠See the following page if you want to use S-video or component video cables for the video connection. TV VCR CO MPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VHF/UHF IN VHF/UHF OUT VHF/UHF IN A/V IN 1 A/V IN 2 A/V OUT 1 2 3 4 5 RL_s Singapore.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 14 En Using other types of video output This recorder has standard (composite), S-video and component video outputs. The main difference between them is the quality of the picture. S-video delivers a better picture than composite video, while component video gives better picture quality still. The variety of outputs also gives you the flexibility of connecting your particular equipment using the best connection type available. 1 Connecting using an S-video output S-video carries the picture as separate color and luminance (brightness) signals. There are two S-video outputs for connection to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other equipment. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). 2 Connecting using the component video output Component video carries the picture as two separate color signals, plus a luminance (brightness) signal. See also Component Video Out on page 78 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scan-compatible TV. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). TV COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO INPUT COMPONENT INPUT 1 2 RL_s Singapore.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 15 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) If you are using a cable box or satellite receiver with only a few scrambled channels, follow the setup on this page. If many or all the channels are scrambled, we recommend using the setup on the following page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record unscrambled channels by selecting them on this recorder. ⢠Record scrambled channels by selecting them on the cable box/satellite tuner and using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 51). ⢠Watch one channel while recording another. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch the output from this recorder. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite tuner to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. Cable box/ Satellite receiver COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VHF/UHF IN VHF/UHF OUT VHF/UHF IN A/V OUT A/V IN 1 1 1 1 2 3 TV RL_s Singapore.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 16 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) If many or all the channels you receive by cable or satellite are scrambled, we recommend using this setup. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner. ⢠Record using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 51). Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch discs. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite tuner to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note ⢠The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another. ⢠The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. TV Cable box/ Satellite receiver COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CON TROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VHF/UHF IN VHF/UHF OUT VHF/UHF IN A/V IN 1 A/V OUT 1 1 1 2 3 RL_s Singapore.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 17 En Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/receiver using the digital optical output. In addition to the digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the standard (composite) video output (as shown here), or the S-video or component video connections. See also Audio Out settings on page 79 for how to set up the digital audio output. (Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amp/receiver.) Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder to your TV âÂÂthroughâ your VCR or other component using A/V cables. Always connect it directly to your TV. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your AV amp/receiver. 3 Use an optical digital audio cable (not supplied) to connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT jack on this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV amp/ receiver. This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound. 4 Connect the AV amp/receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. Note ⢠The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. ⢠If your AV amp/receiver doesnâÂÂt have an optical digital input, but has a coaxial type, converter boxes that convert from optical to coaxial are available at specialist audio dealers. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AC IN OPTICAL CONTROL IN YP B P R IN OUT VHF / UHF INPUT 1/ AUTO START REC RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO RL AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 3 VHF/UHF IN VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT A/V IN 1 DIGIT AL IN OPTICAL 2 4 1 3 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet 1 TV AV amp/ receiver RL_s Singapore.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting up 02 18 En Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 1 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input. 2 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. Plugging in After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. 1 Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet. Analog camcorder VCR î VIDEO/R/RW AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT 1 2 AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT AC IN RL_s Singapore.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 19 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 2 DISC HISTORY (page 65) Press to display the Disc History screen. 3 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 33, 54) Press to directly access the Disc Navigator screen. 4 IR remote sensor (page 8) 5 Disc tray 6 Front panel display See Display on page 20 for details. 7 /â (page 26, 28) Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc. 8 REC MODE (page 43) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). 9 î REC Press to start recording. 10 î Press to stop recording. 11 î Press to start or restart playback. 12 î Press to stop playback. 13 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 14 Front panel inputs (page 12) Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting camcorders and other portable equipment. PULL-OPEN STANDBY/ON DISC NAVIGATOR DISC HISTORY OPEN/CLOSE REC REC MODE î VIDEO/R/RW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 RL_s Singapore.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 20 En Display 1 î PLAY Lights during playback; blinks when paused. 2 î REC Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused. 3 PL (page 55, 60) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 42 3 (page 75) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). 5 REM Lights when the character display is showing the remaining available recording time. 6 (page 78) Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan. 7V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. 8R / RW Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or DVD-RW. 9 (page 44) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set but there isnâÂÂt a recordable disc loaded.) AUTO (page 51) Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and during Auto Start Recording. 10 Recording quality indicators (page 42) FINE Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play). EP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play). MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. 11 Character display 12 Channel recording indicators (page 79) Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. SAP (page 27) Lights when the currently selected TV channel has a Second Audio Program channel. 13 OVER (page 79) Lights when the analog audio input level is too high. 14 NTSC Lights when playing NTSC format video. 6 12 13 14 11 3 2 1 4 5 7 8 9 10 RL_s Singapore.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 21 En Remote control 1 Remote control indicator Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a TV (page 87) and when setting the remote control mode (page 75). 2 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 3 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 4 DVD playback functions AUDIO (page 27, 40, 41) Changes the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 40) Displays/changes the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ANGLE (page 41) Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 5 PLAY MODE (page 37) Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such as search, repeat and program play). 6 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. 7 INPUT SELECT (page 51) Press to change the input to use for recording. 8 CHANNEL /â (page 26) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 9 G-Code (page 47) Press, then use the number buttons to enter a G-Code programming number for timer recording. 10 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 33, 54) / TOP MENU (page 28) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 11 PLAY LIST (page 55, 60) / MENU (page 28) Press to switch between Original and Play List content on VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded. 12 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 13 HOME MENU (page 30) Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 14 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. 15 Playback controls (page 27) î REV SCAN / FWD SCAN î (page 35) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î PLAY Press to start playback. î PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. î STOP Press to stop playback. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the audio or video playing. DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE TOP MENU MENU RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU INPUT SELECT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR ENTER CHANNEL PA USE STOP OK SKIP CM BACK REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN DISC HISTORY NAVI MARK CASE SELECTION CHP MARK EASY TIMER INPUT SELECT DISPLAY TV CONTROL CHANNEL VOLUME REC PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC î î î î CLEAR î î G- CODE 1 3 5 8 11 14 2 9 10 12 13 15 16 19 4 17 7 18 6 RL_s Singapore.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 22 En CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the audio or video playing. î PREV / NEXT î Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î STEP/SLOW î (page 36) During playback, press to start slow-motion playback; while paused, press to show the previous or next video frame. 16 Recording controls (page 26) î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. REC MODE (page 43) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). TIMER REC (page 46) Press to set a timer recording from the standard Timer Recording screen. EASY TIMER (page 45) Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer Recording screen. 17 DISC HISTORY (page 65) Press to display summary information (disc name, recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable discs loaded. NAVI MARK (page 34) Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current title for use in the Disc Navigator screen. CHP MARK (page 58) Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/ recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc. 18 DISPLAY (page 30) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 19 TV CONTROL (page 87) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. RL_s Singapore.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 23 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio output settings. If youâÂÂre using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. Note ⢠Some of the setup Navigator on-screen displays (OSDs) in this section vary slightly depending on the country or region of purchase. 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. 2 Press the î STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or the front panel to switch on. When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup Navigator doesnâÂÂt appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 75). 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to choose a language, then press ENTER . 4 Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup Navigator. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to use the Setup Navigator, press î (cursor down) to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select âÂÂAuto Scanâ to start automatic channel setup, then press ENTER. ⢠Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the channels (because they have already been set up, for example). DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ENTER î Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Language English français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Cancel Complete this setup before you start using your recorder . Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Do not set Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 24 En ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose your country, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. 6 Select âÂÂAutoâ for automatic time setting, or âÂÂManualâ to set the clock manually, then press ENTER. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that the time has been set, select Next to proceed. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Press î (cursor down) then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâ for summer time , then press ENTER . Select On if you are currently using summer time. Set the date and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN . Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Country Selection Country Singapore Initial Setup T uning 32/213 Cancel Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Manual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start Next Initial Setup 01 01 2004 THU 11 20 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 Singapore Singapore Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator On Singapore Singapore Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time 1/ 2 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 Singapore Singapore Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 25 En 7 Select the TV screen type, âÂÂStandard (4:3)â or âÂÂWide (16:9)âÂÂ. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then press ENTER . 8 Is your TV compatible with progressive scan video? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Compatible , Not Compatible , or DonâÂÂt Know , then press ENTER . ⢠Note that progressive scan video is only output through the component video outputs and only when the video source is NTSC (see page 14). 9 Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier/ receiver for digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Connected , or Not Connected , then press ENTER . ⢠If you select Not Connected , that completes the setup. Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select Go Back if you want to go back and start again. ⢠Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier/ receiver is compatible with. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Dolby Digital , Dolby Digital, DTS or PCM only , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure what itâÂÂs compatible with. 10 Is your AV amplifier/receiver compatible with 96 kHz PCM digital audio? Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Compatible , Not Compatible , or DonâÂÂt Know , then press ENTER . ⢠Check the operating instructions that came with your AV amplifier/receiver if youâÂÂre not sure. 11 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select âÂÂGo Backâ if you want to start again. That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. Other settings you can make After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. ItâÂÂs possible, however, that you may want to make a couple of additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set up for TV broadcasts. ⢠Manual channel setting â This setting lets you skip channels where there is no station, as well as manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on page 76. ⢠G-Code channel setting â This setting lets you assign guide channels to ensure that the G-Code programming system works correctly. See G-Code CH Setting on page 77. ⢠Setting up the remote to control your TV â You can set up the supplied remote control to control many brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 87. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control SetSetup Navigator Setup Navigator TV Screen Size Wide (16:9) Standard (4:3) Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control SetSetup Navigator Setup Navigator Initial Setup Progressive Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Digital Connect Connected Not Connected Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator AV Amp Compatibility Dolby Digital Dolby Digital , DTS PCM only Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Compatible Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Set Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup is complete! Enjoy using your DVD recorder! Finish Setup Go Back Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 26 En Making your first recording This quick guide shows you how to make a basic recording of a TV program to a recordable DVD. Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6 ( Recording ). 1 If they arenâÂÂt already on, switch on your TV and this recorder. Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. ⢠Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this recorder. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the disc. ⢠When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder will take a moment to initialize it for recording. 4 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel you want to record from. ⢠You can also use the /â buttons on the front panel if the recorder is stopped. ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. 5 Press î REC to start recording. ⢠By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play) mode, which will give you around two hours of recording from a blank DVD disc. ⢠You can pause recording by pressing î PAUSE . Press î REC or î PAUSE again to restart recording. 6 When you want to stop recording, press î STOP REC. Playing back your recording The TV program you just recorded should be on the DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters. ⢠Press î PLAY to start playback. If you want to stop playback before the end of the recording, press î STOP . Using the built-in TV tuner Changing TV channels There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you canâÂÂt change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. ⢠CHANNEL /â buttons on the remote ⢠Number buttons on the remote â For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34, press 3 , 4 , ENTER . ⢠/â buttons on the front panel Note ⢠Channel presets are numbered 1âÂÂ99. ⢠You canâÂÂt change TV channels during playback or recording, or while in recording standby. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE CHANNEL REC STOP PLAY STOP REC î î î ENTER CHANNEL RL_s Singapore.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 27 En Changing audio channels ⢠Press AUDIO to change the audio. The current audio channel is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 79) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. ⢠If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. ⢠You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. ⢠Some TV programs are broadcast with both a main and a Second Audio Program (SAP). ⢠If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP channel being broadcast, you will still hear the main audio channel. ⢠If the sound is poor quality when set to Stereo , you can often improve it by changing to Mono . ⢠When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 79), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both ( L R ). Note ⢠When recording in Video mode, or in VR mode using the FINE / MN32 setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 79). ⢠In VR mode (excluding FINE / MN32 recordings), both channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. If SAP is selected then both SAP and mono channels are recorded. ⢠In Video mode, or if the recording mode is FINE / MN32 , only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language/audio program you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 79). For a SAP broadcast, select the channel you want to record ( Mono , SAP or Stereo ). Basic playback This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.). More playback features, such as repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. AUDIO NICAM Regular NICAM A NICAM B Regular NICAM A B A (L) B (R) A B (L R) Mono SAP St ereo LR L R RL_s Singapore.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 28 En 1 Press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double- sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 29. 4 Press î PLAY to start playback. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. ⢠See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. 5 To stop playback, press î STOP. 6 When youâÂÂve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. ⢠To open/close the disc tray, press î OPEN/CLOSE . Remove the disc before putting the recorder into standby. ⢠Press î STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into standby. Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE ENTER STOP PLAY î î î î P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play- back starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â but- tons to do this during playback.) Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the num- ber buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER . All: P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. P ress to display the âÂÂtopâ menu or menu of a DVD-V ideo disc (these are often the same). Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD- Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. P ress to return to the previous level of a DVD-V ideo disc menu. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î TO P MENU MENU ENTER RETURN RL_s Singapore.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 29 En Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files. Note ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/ receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 41). ⢠Scanning doesnâÂÂt work with WMA tracks. Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs. Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch. P ress to start playback. P ress to stop playback. P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. CD and MP3 only: P ress to start scanning. P ress again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) P ress to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER P ress to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Video CD only: Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next track. (Y ou can also use the front panel / â buttons to do this during playback.) When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. Video CD only: Each press skips backward/ forward progressively up to a maximum of 10 minutes forward or three minutes back. Note that this function doesnâÂÂt work when playing in PBC mode. During playback, press to start slow- motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward direction only). P ress to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT CLEAR ENTER SKIP CM BACK STEP/SLOW î î RETURN RL_s Singapore.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 30 En Note ⢠When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD /Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing î to start playback instead of î PLAY . Using the Home Menu From the Home Menu screen you can access all the features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu screen: Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not available at the present time. For example, the Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that contains JPEG image files. Displaying disc information on- screen You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded. 1 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the on-screen information. ⢠The on-screen display automatically disappears after 150 minutes. 2 To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. The example displays below are a guide only; actual displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc. Stop display 1 1 DVD-RW Original / Play List If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback is currently set to Original or Play List . 2 Disc type and mode Shows the disc type ( DVD-R , DVD-RW , CD , etc.), and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable ( VR or Video ). 3 Recording mode and time Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. Home menu options Timer Recording (page 44) Disc Setup (page 68) Disc Navigator (page 33, page 54) Initial Setup (page 73) Disc History (page 65) Video/Audio Adjust (page 70) PhotoViewer (page 66) Play Mode (page 37) Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode RETURN HOME MENU ENTER DISPLAY î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name : Comedy shows Finalized Resume FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 1 2 8 7 10 9 3 6 4 5 RL_s Singapore.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 31 En 4 Resume Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last place stopped. 5 Recording time remaining Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in the current recording mode. 6 Preset name and number Shows the preset name and preset number for the currently selected channel. 7 Audio mode Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel preset ( Mono , Stereo , etc.). 8 Copy control information Shows recording restrictions of the current channel program. 9 Disc name Shows the disc name. (For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3 .) 10 Finalized Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized. Stop display 2 1 Date and time 2 Number of titles/tracks on disc For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play List titles are shown separately. Play display 1 1 Number of chapters in title 2 Current title and chapter number (For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG disc, shows current folder and file.) 3 Elapsed title time (For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.) 4 Total running time of title 5 Angle indicator Lights during multi-angle scenes. Play display 2 1 Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback Indicates that recording is in progress. 2 Elapsed chapter time 3 Total running time of chapter 4 Data transfer rate Shows the current data rate being read from the disc. 5 Copy protected material (!) / PureCinema indicator (#) Shows â ! â if the playback material is copy-once protected. Shows â # â if the current video is 24 fps, progressive scan. Recording display 1 Current title number 2 Elapsed recording time 3 Timer recording start and stop times Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is a timer recording. 4 Remaining recording time available Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current recording mode. 5 Recording mode Shows the current recording mode ( FINE , SP , LP , etc.), and the total recording time of the disc. î Stop DVD-RW VR Original Titles : Original 99 Lock Disc : On Play List 15 14:52 MON 15/11/2004 Copy Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 1 2 î Play DVD-R Video Title T otal Chapters 15 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 0. 11. 52 5 1 2 3 4 î Play DVD-R Video Title Name 11/21 soccer game : C hapter T otal îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî C hapter Time 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 ! # 0. 00. 21 0. 01. 52 4.32Mbps î Rec 5 2 3 4 1 î Rec DVD-R VIDEO FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m 21:00 â 22:00 30 . 00. 15 Co py Once St ereo ABC Pr 1 5 1 2 3 4 RL_s Singapore.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 32 En Note ⢠When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. ⢠Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality. ⢠The Video mode disc displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. ⢠The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the displayed record setting. ⢠Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. ⢠The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. ⢠Copy Once or CanâÂÂt Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV program contains copy control information. RL_s Singapore.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 33 En Chapter 5 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ î (cursor buttons) and ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3 discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW Commercially produced DVD or finalized Video mode DVD-R/RW Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized) VR mode DVD-RW Audio CD Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files MP3 files ⢠Some DVD-Video discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as making a program list, are not available in PBC mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by pressing î . ⢠For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 66. Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/ MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR (front panel or remote), which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select what you want to play. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to highlight items and ENTER to select. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different. DVD DVD-Video Video mode VR mode CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 MP3 DISC NAVIGAT OR HOME MENU ENTER DVD-Video CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup V ideo/Audio Adjust Play Mode RL_s Singapore.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 34 En The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter within a title. The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks. The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area between CD and WMA/MP3 . This can only be done while the disc is stopped. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs When used with a recordable disc, the Disc Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play titles. See also Editing on page 54 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the menu options. Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a title to play. 4 Press ENTER to start playback. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls: Press DISC NAVIGATOR , then use the / â buttons to select a title. Press î PLAY to start playback. Note ⢠The Disc Navigator is only accessible when there is a disc loaded. ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD in PBC mode. ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use the time search mode. See Search Mode on page 37. Changing the thumbnail picture for a title You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI MARK button. DVD Title (1-10) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-003) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Disc Navigator CD T rack (1-10) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 T otal Time 0.58.25 Disc Navigator WMA/MP3 CD Folder (1-03) 01.Rock 02.Pop 03.Dance T rack (1-004) 001.Intro 002.Escape 003.Everything Y ou Say 004.What I Do Disc Navigator VR mode Video mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode NAVI MARK ENTER PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î RL_s Singapore.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 35 En 1 Start playback of the title you want to change the thumbnail for. 2 Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title. ⢠For greater control over the exact frame you want to use, you can use the î PAUSE and/or slow-motion/ frame advance/reverse controls ( î / î ). Navigating discs During playback you can easily jump to another title, chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on the remote. 1 During playback use the number buttons to enter a chapter number within the current title. For example, for chapter 6, press 6 ; for chapter 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new chapter. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a title number. For example, for title 6, press 6 ; for title 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new title. 1 During playback, use the number buttons to input a track number. For example, for track 6, press 6 ; for track 24, press 2 , then 4 . ⢠To clear and start again, press CLEAR . 2 Optionally: Press ENTER. ⢠Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback will jump to the new track. Scanning discs You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backward. 1 During playback, press î or î to start reverse or forward scanning. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. ⢠Forward: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Reverse: Reverse play î SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 î SCAN 3 î SCAN 4 ⢠Forward/Reverse: SCAN 1 î SCAN 2 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth. ⢠Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs (analog output only). ⢠Scanning is not possible with WMA files. ALL ENTER CLEAR DVD-Video Video mode VR mode CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN DVD CD Video CD S uper VCD MP3 RL_s Singapore.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 36 En ⢠No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video discs. ⢠Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 . (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output.*) No sound is output when using other scan speeds. * Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. Playing in slow motion You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be played forwards in slow motion. 1 Press î or î to start slow motion reverse or forward playback. 2 Press the same button repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played. ⢠Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. ⢠No sound is output during slow-motion playback. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc frame- by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î PAUSE. 2 Press î or î to back up or advance one frame. ⢠Hold down î or î for continuous frame reverse/ frame advance. 3 To resume normal playback, press î PLAY. Note ⢠The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. DVD Video CD S uper VCD PLAY STEP/SLOW î î SL OW 1/16 SL OW 1/8 SL OW 1/2 SL OW 1/4 DVD Video CD S uper VCD PA USE PLAY STEP/SLOW î î RL_s Singapore.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 37 En The Play Mode menu The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and program play functions. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Play Mode features with Video CD/ Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions, see the following sections. 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu screen. ⢠You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU ). 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to navigate. ⢠To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . Search Mode The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/ track number. 1 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select one of the search options. 3 Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/ folder/track number or the search time (in hours, minutes & seconds). Time Search (DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0 . For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0 . Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 45 minutes into the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0 . Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 . Alternatively, you can use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) buttons. 4 Press ENTER. Tip ⢠You can often select what you want to watch on a DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to display the disc menu. Note ⢠When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. ⢠Time search doesnâÂÂt work with Super VCDs. ALL PLAY MODE ENTER CLEAR PLAY Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Input Time 0.01.00 Play Mode RL_s Singapore.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 38 En A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs. 1 During playback, select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 With âÂÂA (Loop Start)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to start. After setting the loop start point, the highlight will automatically move down to B(Loop End) . 3 With âÂÂB (Loop End)â highlighted, press ENTER at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. ⢠When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. 4 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the A-B Repeat menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled. Repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Program play below). 1 Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select a repeat play mode. ⢠For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs, select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). ⢠For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc , Repeat Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off ). 3 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂRepeat Offâ from the Repeat Play menu. ⢠You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note ⢠If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled. ⢠If there is a program list, you can also select Repeat Program to repeat the program list. DVD CD Video CD Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off Play Mode ALL Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Repeat Disc Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off Play Mode VR mode DVD-Video Video mode CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 RL_s Singapore.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 39 En Program play This feature lets you program the play order of titles/ chapters/folders/tracks on a disc. 1 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 Select âÂÂInput/Edit Programâ from the list of program options. The Program edit screen that appears depends on the kind of disc loaded. On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD, Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3). 3 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter within a title to the program list. ⢠To add a title, select the title. ⢠To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press î (cursor right)and select a chapter from the list. For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a track within a folder to the program list. ⢠To add a folder, select the folder. ⢠To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press î (cursor right) and select a track from the list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ track, the step number automatically moves down one. ⢠To insert a step into the program list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER , all the subsequent steps move down one. ⢠To delete a step from the program list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR . 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/ folders/tracks. 5 To play the program list, press î PLAY. Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the recorder. Tip ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . ⢠You can change the program list by selecting Input/ Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu. ⢠During program play, press î to skip to the next program step. ⢠Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program play (if no menu OSD, such as the Play Mode menu, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program list. Other Program play functions As well as creating and editing a program list, you can start program play, cancel program play, and erase the program list from the Play Mode menu. 1 Press PLAY MODE and select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 2 Select a program play function. ⢠Input/Edit Program â See above ⢠Start Program Play â Starts playback of a saved program list DVD-Video CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Input/Edit Program Start Program Play Cancel Program Play Erase Program List Play Mode Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title (1-38) Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter (1-004) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack (1-12) T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 To tal Time 0.00.00 Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder (1-06) 01. Pop 02. Electronic 03. Jazz 04. Indie 05. Rock 06. Classic T rack (1-010) 001. T rack 01 002. T rack 02 003. T rack 03 004. T rack 04 005. T rack 05 006. T rack 06 007. T rack 07 008. T rack 08 Program RL_s Singapore.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 40 En ⢠Cancel Program Play â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Erase Program List â Erases the program list and turns off program play Note ⢠When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. ⢠You can use repeat play with program play. Start playback of the program list then select Program Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 38). Displaying and switching subtitles Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. 2 To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR. Note ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 81. Switching DVD soundtracks When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio soundtrack. Note ⢠The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 81. ⢠Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/ receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver on page 17 for connection details. DVD-Video SUBTITLE CLEAR Subtitle: 1/2 English The toucan lives in tropical forests DVD-Video AUDIO Audio : 1/2 Dolby Digital 2/0CH RL_s Singapore.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 05 41 En Switching audio channels For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or both ( L R ). When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. 1 To display/switch the audio channel, press AUDIO repeatedly. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on- screen. ⢠L R â Both channels (default) ⢠L â Left channel only ⢠R â Right channel only ⢠Stereo â Stereo (default) ⢠1/L â Left channel only ⢠2/R â Right channel only ⢠1 Stereo â Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default) ⢠1 L â Soundtrack 1 / Left channel ⢠1 R â Soundtrack 1 / Right channel ⢠2 Stereo â Soundtrack 2 / Stereo ⢠2 L â Soundtrack 2 / Left channel ⢠2 R â Soundtrack 2 / Right channel Note ⢠When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital î PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 80) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Angle Indicator on page 86). ⢠To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE. ⢠The angle number is displayed on-screen. ⢠If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. ⢠Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while repeat playback is active. Note ⢠You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access. VR mode CD V ideo CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 AUDIO VR mode CD Video CD WMA/MP3 S uper VCD DVD-Video ANGLE RL_s Singapore.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 42 En Chapter 6 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW media. The main difference between the two is that DVD- R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times. A further difference between the two disc types is that only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording, which offers much more comprehensive editing functions compared to Video mode recording. The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes below). While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc will be in the chosen recording mode. Important ⢠You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/ RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs recorded on this recorder are not playable on other players/recorders.) ⢠This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder. ⢠Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Input Line System on page 74. Note ⢠Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. ⢠The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99. ⢠The maximum number of chapters recordable on a DVD-R/RW disc is 999. ⢠No more recording is possible on a disc that already contains the maximum number of chapters/titles. Recording time and picture quality There are four preset recording quality modes: ⢠FINE â Highest quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time. ⢠SP (Standard Play) â Default quality, sufficient for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time. ⢠LP (Long Play) â Slightly lower video quality, but doubles the recording time to around four hours. ⢠EP (Extended Play) â Use when maximum recording time is most important; EP gives you around six hours of recording time. In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different recording quality/time settings when manual recording mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 82), giving you precise control over the recording. When setting a timer recording there is a further option, AUTO , which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. In all except the FINE / MN32 modes, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE / MN32 , sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording in Video mode, or in VR mode on the FINE / MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 79) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. Note ⢠Note that all recording times (both here and those shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is because of the way that the video is recorded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what youâÂÂre recording. RL_s Singapore.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 43 En Restrictions on video recording ⢠You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy- protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. ⢠Video that is âÂÂcopy-once onlyâ can only be recorded on a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below). ⢠When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 30). CPRM CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system regarding the recording of âÂÂcopy onceâ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media . This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD- RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. ⢠This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Setting the picture quality/recording time Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are four standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. ItâÂÂs also possible to create a fifth, âÂÂmanualâ setting for picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this, however, you will need to set the Manual Recording option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording on page 82). ⢠Press REC MODE (remote or front panel) repeatedly to select a recording setting. ⢠FINE â Fine picture quality ⢠SP â Standard play ⢠LP â Long play ⢠EP â Extended play ⢠MN â Manual (available only when manual recording is on) The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 74) is Off then this information is not displayed.) VR mode Video mode REC MODE RL_s Singapore.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 44 En Basic recording from the TV Follow the instructions below to record a TV program. Recording starts immediately and continues until the disc is full or you stop the recording. 1 Load a recordable disc. ⢠If you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc. 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to select the TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number: ⢠While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel. (For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER ; for channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER ) ⢠If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the /â buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. 3 Use the REC MODE button to set the picture quality/recording time. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time above for detailed instructions. 4 Use the AUDIO button to select the audio channel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 27 for more on this. ⢠When recording in VR mode, both mono and SAP audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to FINE / MN32 , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. 5 Press î REC to start recording. If you want to set a recording end time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time, press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording. (If recording in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts) 6 To stop the recording, press î STOP REC. ⢠If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the DVD. Setting a timer recording Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programs can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 83 for more on this). VR mode Video mode AUDIO ENTER CHANNEL REC PA USE STOP REC REC MODE î 23 30 7 Channel preset PR VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 45 En Important â¢A timer recording canâÂÂt be set if: â Auto Start Recording is in progress. â There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be recorded. ⢠Timer recording will not start if: â The recorder is already recording. â A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. ⢠Except when finalizing Video mode discs, timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. ⢠If a recordable DVD that doesnâÂÂt support simultaneous playback and recording (see Simultaneous recording and playback on page 50) is playing when a timer recording is due to start, playback will automatically stop to allow the recording to start. ⢠The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable. ⢠Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto Start Recording function (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 51). A timer recording will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start Recording will resume after the timer recording has finished.) ⢠Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby (assuming that a recordable disc is loaded). In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. 1 Press EASY TIMER. Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU and select Timer Recording then Easy Timer Recording ). 2 Set the TV channel and recording quality. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to set the channel you want to record. ⢠Use the REC MODE button to set the recording quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE , SP , LP , EP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording mode is on). DVD RECORDER RETURN HOME MENU EASY TIMER ENTER CHANNEL REC MODE îÂÂî 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 Easy Timer Recording FINE Pr 7 13/12 WED --:-- 9:30 CHANNEL / â REC MODE RL_s Singapore.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 46 En ⢠The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. 3 Use îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to move the cursor to the recording start date and time on the grid. ⢠You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at a time using the î and î buttons. Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 minute interval. The darker area represents time that has already passed and canâÂÂt therefore be selected. The lighter area is time thatâÂÂs available. 4 Press ENTER to set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. ⢠You can go back and reset the start time if you need to by pressing RETURN . 5 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor position, representing the length of the recording. A recording of up to six hours can be set. 6 Press ENTER to set the end time. 7 Select âÂÂYesâ to set the timer recording and exit, or âÂÂNoâ to go back to the timer recording screen. ⢠You can check the timer recording details you just set from the main timer recording screen (see Standard timer recording below). Standard timer recording The timer recording screen you can see all the timer programs already set, clear programs and set up new ones. 1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). This screen shows all the timer programs currently set. ⢠Each row is for one timer recording program, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode and recording status. ⢠The amount of free space available on the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen. ⢠In the lower-right corner, the number of timer programs already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms . ⢠If there are more than eight timer programs already set, press NEXT î to switch page (go back using the PREV î button). Easy Timer Recording 8: 00 9: 00 10: 00 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 11:45 FINE Pr 7 13/12 WED Current time Recording start time - - : - - CHANNEL / â REC MODE Easy Timer Recording 11: 00 12: 00 13: 00 14: 00 15: 00 16: 00 17: 00 13/12 14/12 15/12 11:45 13:45 FINE Pr 7 13/12 WED Recording start time Recording end time CHANNEL / â REC MODE HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR PREV NEXT TIMER REC îÂÂî WED 13/12 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 SP OK Date Start Stop CH Mode Confirm Timer Recording New Input DVD Remain 1h20m (SP) 1/1 RL_s Singapore.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 47 En ⢠You can also clear a timer program before itâÂÂs started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . 2 Select âÂÂNew Inputâ to set a new timer program, then press ENTER. 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a field; use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value. ⢠Date â Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly program. ⢠Start â Set the recording start time. ⢠Stop â Set the recording end time (maximum length of a timer recording is six hours). ⢠CH â Choose a channel (1âÂÂ99, excluding skip channels), or one of the external inputs from which to record. ⢠Mode â Select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 42). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Ttl Name Input â Optionally, you can enter a name for the recording up to 32 characters. (Highlight Program Set then press î (cursor down) to access this option.) 4 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight âÂÂProgram setâ and press ENTER. The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer program you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: ⢠If there are already the maximum number of titles or chapters on the disc, the message Title Over or Data Over appears. (There can be up to 99 titles on a disc.) ⢠If a timer program overlaps another in the list, the message Overlap appears. ⢠If no recordable disc is loaded, the message CanâÂÂt Rec appears. ⢠Standby is displayed when the recorder is in timer recording standby. ⢠Recording is displayed when a timer recording is in progress. 5 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME MENU. Note ⢠The rightmost column in the timer recording screen ( Confirm ) shows whether thereâÂÂs enough space to record your timer program. If you selected a daily or weekly program, the date of the last recording that will fit on the disc appears (up to a maximum of one month ahead). ⢠If the timer program is too long to fit into the available disc space, the message Time Over appears. The program will record until the disc is full. ⢠If Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 83) is set to On , the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the program is too long even when recorded in EP (extended play), the message Time Over appears. Timer recording using the G-Code⢠programming system This system makes programming timer recordings very simple. Most TV guides publish G-Code programming numbers with their program details. If you want to make a timer recording of a program, you just input the corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell the recorder the recording mode, and whether itâÂÂs a once-only recording or a regular recording. Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode SUN 12/12 10 00 11 00 Pr 7 SP Timer Recording Ttl Name Input Program Set HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR REC MODE îÂÂî G- CODE RL_s Singapore.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 48 En 1 Press âÂÂG-Codeâ to display the G-Code program screen. You can also access this screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then G- Code ). ⢠Use the number buttons to enter the G-Code programming number. (To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR .) ⢠Press REC MODE to select FINE , SP , LP , EP or AUTO (See Recording time and picture quality on page 42). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the MN setting. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the Once , Daily or Weekly recording option. 2 After making the settings, press ENTER. The program details are shown at the bottom of the screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically exited. ⢠If you havenâÂÂt set up the guide channels (or at least the guide channel for the number that you entered), the recorder will prompt you to enter the channel number that the TV program is showing on. Tip ⢠You can check the timer program settings by pressing TIMER REC to display the timer recording screen. G-Code programming with the power off You can enter a G-Code programming number when the recorder is in standby. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature until you have set up the guide channels. See G-Code CH Setting on page 77. ⢠You canâÂÂt change the recording mode. ⢠You canâÂÂt program daily or weekly timer recordings. 1 Press âÂÂG-CodeâÂÂ. The front panel display shows the current recording mode and prompts you to enter the G-Code programming number. 2 Use the number buttons to enter the number. ⢠To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR . 3 Press ENTER. The display shows the timer settings: Date î Start time î End time î Recording channel. ⢠If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that the number is correct and that the guide channel is set (see G-Code CH Setting on page 77), then set the timer recording again. ⢠If CANâÂÂT SET appears in the display, it means that although you entered a valid number, the program has already finished. Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time in two different ways. This can be useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example. to input 3 9 9 2 4 09 G-Code# Rec Mode Rec Times G-Code MN21 Once Daily Weekly REC MODE to change to change level to change ENTER CLEAR G- CODE G- C O D E 29 3 24 HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR REC PREV NEXT STOP REC TIMER REC î RL_s Singapore.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 49 En Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. The timer indicator disappears from the front panel display. 2 Press î REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute increments. Programming a new end time 1 During timer recording, press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording (View) ). 2 Use the î (cursor up) button to highlight the current timer recording (âÂÂRecordingâ is shown in the âÂÂConfirmâ column), then press ENTER. A screen showing details of the timer recording appears. From this screen, only the recording stop time can be changed. 3 Set a new Stop time for the timer recording. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select the hour or minute field, then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the time. 4 Press ENTER to set the new time and exit the screen. Recording will continue until the new stop time is reached. Canceling and stopping a timer recording in progress After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the program (but continue recording), or stop recording completely if you need to. 1 During timer recording, press and hold î REC for three seconds. Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator disappears); recording continues so that you can manually stop recording whenever you like. 2 When you want to stop recording completely, press î STOP REC. Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. 1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 Press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCK . If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again. ⢠To unlock the recorder, press and hold î STOP on the front panel for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK . ⢠To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then press and hold î REC for three seconds. New Input WED 13/12 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 SP Recording Date Start Stop CH Mode Confirm Timer Recording DVD Remain 1h20m (SP) 1/1 Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode TUE 12/12 10 00 11 00 Pr 7 SP Timer Recording Program Set Ttl Name Input REC ST OP REC î RL_s Singapore.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 50 En Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions ⢠Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesnâÂÂt start recording! Check that the disc loaded is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 68), and that there are fewer than 99 titles already on the DVD. ⢠The recorder wonâÂÂt let me enter a timer program! Why not? You canâÂÂt enter a timer program if the clock isnâÂÂt set. ⢠What happens when two or more timer programs overlap? Basically, the program with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the program with the later start time after the earlier program is finished. If two programs have the same times (but different channels, for example), the program set most recently takes priority. â¢I entered a timer program, but the recorder doesnâÂÂt confirm whether or not itâÂÂs OK. Why not? Timer confirmation only works for DVD recordings when there is a recordable disc loaded. Also make sure that the disc is not locked (see Lock Disc on page 68) and that there are fewer than 99 titles already recorded. Note that itâÂÂs possible that although the timer recording screen says OK , the recording doesnâÂÂt complete successfully because of some other reason, such as a damaged disc, etc. Simultaneous recording and playback A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a recording in progress from the start of the recording (as in, playback is âÂÂchasingâ the recording). For example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start watching the movie, from the beginning, while the recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you. In fact, youâÂÂre not just limited to watching the recording in progress; you can watch anything else already on the DVD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs on page 34). Important ⢠Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature. ⢠You may not be able to use this feature with a DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another recorder. ⢠During recording, press î PLAY to start playback from the beginning of the current recording, or press DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play from there. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. ⢠To stop playback, press î STOP (recording will continue). ⢠To stop recording, press î STOP REC (playback will continue). Note ⢠You canâÂÂt start playback immediately after recording starts. ⢠When scanning, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording (see Scanning discs on page 35). ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature during Auto Start Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display). VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 51 En Recording from an external component You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorderâÂÂs external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options. 2 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. There are three analog inputs. The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: ⢠L1 â Input 1/Auto Start Rec ⢠L2 â Input 2 (front panel) ⢠L3 â Input 3 Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio , Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In settings on page 79). ⢠If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 43 for detailed information. 4 Press î REC when youâÂÂre ready to start recording. Note ⢠If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 43 for more details. Automatic recording from a satellite tuner If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top box connected to the L1 input, you can have the recorder start and stop recording automatically with the timer settings of the connected component. (If the other component doesnâÂÂt have a built-in timer, youâÂÂll need to use it with an external timer unit.) After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder starts recording when it detects a signal from the other component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops recording. If you want to use this recorder with the timer features of your satellite tuner, see Language code list on page 92. Important ⢠It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear this in mind when setting the timer. ⢠If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if another timer recording is in progress. ⢠Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer recording is due to start. After the timer recording has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume. 1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other component), then switch it into standby (if necessary). Check the manual that came with the receiver if youâÂÂre not sure how to do this. 2 Load a recordable disc into this recorder. 3 Check that the âÂÂAudio Inâ settings for âÂÂExternal Audioâ and âÂÂBilingual Recordingâ are as you want them. See Audio In settings on page 79 for more on these settings. VR mode Video mode INPUT SELECT ENTER CLEAR REC REC MODE î î îÂÂî VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 52 En 4 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 43 for detailed information. 5 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto Start RecordingâÂÂ. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or âÂÂNoâ to switch off. 7 Switch the recorder into standby. The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights. The recorder will automatically switch on and start recording when the other component comes on. Recording stops when the external component switches off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording, press î STANDBY/ ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO indicator goes off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has already started, press î REC for three seconds, then î STOP REC . ⢠When a timer recording is in progress ahead of Auto Start Recording, some functions, such as extending the timer recording and chase play, are not available. Press the front panel button for three seconds to cancel Auto Start Recording without affecting the timer recording. The AUTO indicator goes off. Note ⢠You canâÂÂt set Auto Start Recording when: ⢠the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby. ⢠there is no recordable disc loaded. ⢠the disc loaded is locked. ⢠the disc loaded already contains the maximum number of titles (99). Playing your recordings on other DVD players Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it canâÂÂt be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 68 before starting the steps below. Important ⢠Once youâÂÂve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode, you canâÂÂt edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe âÂÂundoneâÂÂ; see Undo Finalize on page 69 for how to do this. â¢A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. VR mode Video mode VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 06 53 En 2 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ from the finalize options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 5 For Video mode discs only, select a title menu style, then select âÂÂYesâ to start finalization or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the âÂÂtop menuâ is selected on any DVD player. ⢠Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 6 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: ⢠If the finalization process is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. ⢠How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes. Note ⢠If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initializing a DVD-RW disc When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will initialize it automatically for recording. You can also manually initialize DVD-RW discs. You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording. Important ⢠Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! ⢠You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂInitializeâ 3 Select âÂÂVideo Modeâ or âÂÂVR Modeâ from the initialize options. 4 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc. Note ⢠By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 83 if you want to change the default to Video mode. ⢠If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. Finalize Undo Finalize Next Screen Start Disc Setup Basic Initialize Finalize T I T L E M E N U TITLE MENU Finalize DVD-RW VR Mode Video Mode Start Start Basic Initialize Finalize Disc Setup Initializing Disc 1 min left Pr 1 RL_s Singapore.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 54 En Chapter 7 Editing Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs . The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD , and whether youâÂÂre editing Original content, or a Play List. With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible. There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesnâÂÂt actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players). The Disc Navigator screen 1 Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. Video Mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Recording Time 0h30m40s Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Edit mode Disc Navigat or menu options Disc recording mode Number of title pages Locked title indicator Information f or selected title Recording time av ailable in the displayed recording mode Currently selected title RETURN DISC NAVIGAT OR PLAY LIST HOME MENU ENTER CLEAR PREV PLAY NEXT Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) RL_s Singapore.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 55 En ⢠You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Disc Navigator then press ENTER ). ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight the command you want from the menu options on the left, then press ENTER . Most commands require you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do this. ⢠When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the PREV ( î ) and NEXT ( î ) buttons to display the previous/next page if there are more than six titles/ nine chapters. ⢠As you highlight different thumbnails, information about the title is shown in the central area of the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information displayed. ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator screens. ⢠Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc Navigator. 2 To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU . Remember ⢠You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles using the NAVI MARK buttonâÂÂsee Changing the thumbnail picture for a title on page 34. Disc Navigator menu options The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the VR mode and Video mode discs are shown below. ⢠Play â Play a title (page 56) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 56) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 59) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 56) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 59) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 59) (Original) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 56) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title (page 56) ⢠Lock/Unlock â Lock or unlock a title to prevent accidental changes being made (page 59) ⢠Erase â Erase a title (page 56) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles (page 59) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 59) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a title (page 57) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 58) (Play List) ⢠Create â Make a new Play List title (page 62) ⢠Chapter Edit ( Chpt Edit ) â Make detailed changes to chapters in a Play List title (page 61) ⢠Move â Move the position of a title in the Play List (page 63) ⢠Erase All â Erase all titles in the Play List (page 64) ⢠Undo â Undo the last change (page 64) ⢠Play â Play a title (page 60) ⢠Erase â Erase a title from the Play List (page 60) ⢠Title Name ( Ttl Name ) â Name or rename a title in the Play List (page 60) ⢠Combine â Combine two Play List titles into one (page 63) ⢠Divide â Divide a Play List title into two (page 63) ⢠Erase Section (Erase Sec) â Erase a part of a title (page 62) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Playlist / Original indicator Video mode VR mode VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 56 En Editing VR mode Original and Video mode content These commands affect the actual content stored on the DVD-R/RW. Remember ⢠If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original screen. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to play, then press ENTER or î PLAY. Playback of the title you selected starts. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls for the Play function: Press DISC NAVIGATOR , then use the / â buttons to select a title. Press î PLAY to start playback. Erase The Erase title command does slightly different things depending on what you are currently editing. If you are editing Original content on a VR mode disc the title will be erased from the disc and the available recording time will increase accordingly. If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title will disappear from the list of titles, but the available recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Tip ⢠You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER . (You can also use this method to erase titles when using the Play function, above.) Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode recordings and 32 characters for Video mode recordings. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to the name input screen. 3 Input a name for the selected title. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. VR mode Video mode 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 456 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Video Mode VR mode Video mode Original DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1/1 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Video mode Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP RL_s Singapore.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 57 En â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name below. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâ then press ENTER to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R ), press î to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. *1 lower-case: ÿ; upper -case: àChapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER. After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below). ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER (see also the note below) Key Characters Key Characters 1 . , â ? ! â & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ 2 a b c 2 ä àá â ã æ ç 7 p q r s 7 $ ÿ/à*1 3 d e f 3 è é ë ê 8 t u v 8 ü ù û ú 4 g h i 4 î ï ì àá 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 ã 0 0 î [cursor back] î [cursor forward] îÂÂ/ î [change case] CLEAR [clear character] î <space> î [ï¬Ânish name input] G- Code ~ ( ) _ / : ; â ` ^ @ # â % ÃÂ¥ | = { } [ ] < > VR mode Original DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Preview Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Original Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 RL_s Singapore.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 58 En ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command (only works with VR mode disc edits). 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. Note ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. ⢠It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. Inserting chapter markers into a title You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP MARK button while playing the title or during recording. This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content but also for editing purposes. 1 Start playback of the title you want to create new chapter markers in. You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator menu to do this. 2 Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a new chapter to begin. A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted: ⢠For greater control over the exact position of chapter markers it can be useful to use the î PAUSE button and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse controls ( îÂÂ/î ). Note ⢠You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start Recording. ⢠If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder automatically starts a new chapter when you restart the recording. ⢠When recording in Video mode, the recorder automatically puts chapter markers in at regular intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter markers manually after recording (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 83). ⢠The Play List and Original content on a disc can each contain up to 999 chapters. Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of an Original title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. VR mode CHP MARK PA USE î î VR mode Original Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-1 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B RL_s Singapore.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 59 En 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Lock / Unlock You can lock a title so that it canâÂÂt be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also canâÂÂt undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. 1 Select âÂÂLockâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock. Erase All This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock / Unlock on page 59). 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo a Lock command. î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B VR mode Video mode Original 1/1 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Video mode Original 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Lock Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Ye s N o VR mode Video mode RL_s Singapore.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 60 En ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Creating and editing a VR mode Play List A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual (Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video content on the disc, and it allows greater control over editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you want it. Remember ⢠Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List edit screen. ⢠The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to play, then press ENTER. Playback of the title you selected starts. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls for the Play function: Press DISC NAVIGATOR , then use the / â buttons to select a title. Press î PLAY to start playback. Erase This command erases a title only from the Play List. The title remains in the Original content and the available recording time does not increase. 1 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to erase, then press ENTER. 3 Highlight âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to erase. Note ⢠The remaining recording time doesnâÂÂt change when you erase something from the Play List. Title Name (Ttl Name) You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long. 1 Select âÂÂTtl Nameâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to name, then press ENTER. 3 Input a name for the selected title. Press ENTER after selecting each character. VR mode VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP Play Erase Ttl Name Chpt Edit Erase Sec DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Erase Title? Ye s N o VR mode Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 1 2:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP RL_s Singapore.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 61 En â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 57. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Highlight âÂÂOKâÂÂ, then press ENTER to fix the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to name. Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, moving, combining and dividing. You can also play individual chapters to check their content. 1 Select âÂÂChpt Editâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that contains the chapters you want to edit, then press ENTER . After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear and youâÂÂll see that the Disc Navigator menu items change to the chapter editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase and press ENTER . ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Select the chapter you want to divide. From the following screen use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen. ⢠Combine â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Select the dividing line between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER . ⢠Move â Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you want to move, press ENTER , then highlight the new location for it, then press ENTER again. ⢠Preview â Preview chapters: Select the chapter you want to play; press î STOP to return to the chapter edit screen. ⢠Undo â Undo the last command. 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on the left side of the screen. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN again, or select âÂÂBackâ from the menu options on the left. VR mode DVD 1/1 Chapter Edit Back Erase Divide Combine Move Undo 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP Title 1 Chapter 0h03m 2 Play List Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-3 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause Divide Back Title Recording Time LP Chapter 0h01m24s 0h00m 1 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 RL_s Singapore.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 62 En Erase Section (Erase Sec) Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Select âÂÂErase Secâ from the Disc Navigator menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a title. After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from which you can mark the start and end points of the section to erase. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂFromâ highlighted) press ENTER . The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker appears under the bar to show the start of the section. 4 In the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then (with âÂÂToâ highlighted) press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , another marker appears under the bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. 6 Erase another section from the same title, or press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Create Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List. When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List (you can erase bits you donâÂÂt need laterâÂÂsee Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) on page 61). The title appears in the Play List complete with the chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these are not automatically copied over into the Play List title. You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂCreateâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select the insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER. If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not apply. 3 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select an Original title to put into the Play List. VR mode Play List Erase Sec DVD Erase Sec 1-2 0.00.52.17 î Play Pause From To Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s A B 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 î Play Pause 0.02.09.17 From T A A B VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 1 2 Play List 1/1 Undo DVD ORG1 ORG4 ORG2 ORG3 Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) RL_s Singapore.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 63 En 4 Press ENTER to add the title. The new title appears in the updated Play List. 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another location for a new title. Move Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. 1 Select âÂÂMoveâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title you want to move, then press ENTER. 3 Select a new position in the Play List for the title, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or select another title to move. Divide Use this command to split a title up into two new titles. 1 Select âÂÂDivideâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select the title that you want to divide, then press ENTER. 3 Use the playback controls to find the place you want to divide the title. You can use all the usual playback controls, including î PLAY , î PAUSE , scan ( î , î ), and slow-motion ( î , î ). 4 With âÂÂDivideâ highlighted, press ENTER to divide the title at the current playback position. 5 To return to the Disc Navigator menu options, select âÂÂBackâ and press ENTER . Combine Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles into one. 1 Select âÂÂCombineâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Highlight the bar divider between the two titles you want to combine, then press ENTER. Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 1 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) 2 3 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Play List Divide DVD Divide Chapter 1-1 0.00.08.26 î Play Pause Divide Back Title 1 Recording Time LP 0h01m24s 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 4 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) RL_s Singapore.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 07 64 En After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. 3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator menu options, or continue combining more titles. Erase All This command erases all the titles from the Play List. 1 Select âÂÂErase Allâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel, then press ENTER. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words, you can undo the last three edits you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the Disc Navigator Play List menu options. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo a Lock command. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Play List 1/1 Undo DVD Disc Navigator 123 Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode Play List 1/1 Undo DVD 123 4 Disc Navigator Erase all titles? Ye s N o Create Move Divide Combine Erase All DVD Remain 0h37m(FINE) VR mode RL_s Singapore.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Disc History 08 65 En Chapter 8 Disc History The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded. It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode and the lock status of the disc. Using the Disc History 1 Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History screen. The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc loaded, it is shown in the list with a âÂÂdisc inâ icon. ⢠The Disc History screen is also accessible from the Home Menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to see title information for other discs in the list. ⢠To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you canâÂÂt remove the currently loaded disc). ⢠You can see the available recording time for different recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button. 3 To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME MENU or DISC HISTORY. Tip ⢠You can also use the front panel controls to navigate the Disc History screen: Press DISC HISTORY , then use the / â buttons to move up and down the list. Note ⢠When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is a number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you want to (see Input Disc Name on page 68). ⢠When you change the display for the available recording time using the REC MODE button, only the display is changed; the actual recording mode is not affected. ⢠The following discs appear in the Disc History list in gray: â Discs with no available recording space left â Locked discs â Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or 999 chapters â Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to the recorderâÂÂs current setting. ⢠When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information for that disc disappears from the Disc History. VR mode Video mode Disc History LP DVD Remain Disc Name Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 T oday's Football Enjoy Golf! Social dance Lesson Titles : 8 DVD-RW VR 625 System News Sport T ravel Movie Music 1h54m 2h35m 1h22m 0h30m 1h38m 1/2 Disc name Disc lock indicator Recorded Line Sy stem of disc Av ailable recording space Recording time av ailable Recording mode Number of titles on disc Disc type and recording mode Title information for the selected disc Disc loaded Other discs Selec ted disc RL_s Singapore.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 9 66 En Chapter 9 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV. Playing a slideshow 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ to display the PhotoViewer screen. ⢠The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc containing JPEG files is loaded. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a folder from the folder list. The first nine images from the selected folder are displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen. 3 Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area. The first thumbnail image is highlighted. ⢠To get back to the folder list, press RETURN . 4 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to select a thumbnail. ⢠Use the î and î buttons to display the previous/ next page of thumbnails. 5 Press ENTER or î PLAY to start playing a slideshow from the selected thumbnail. ⢠Use the î PREV / NEXT î buttons to display the previous/next picture, or the î PAUSE button to pause the slideshow. 6 Press î STOP or RETURN to return to the thumbnail view area. 7 To return to the folder view area, press RETURN. ⢠To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU . Note ⢠Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see below). ⢠The time it takes for the recorder to load a file increases with large file sizes. ⢠Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or either side (depending on the picture). ⢠If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 10). Reloading files from a disc If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Use the î (cursor down) button to navigate to the last entry in the folder list (âÂÂRead next: ...âÂÂ). 2 Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc. It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the images. PhotoViewer 1/2 1/3 01. 12/12 TUE 02. 13/12 WED 03. 14/12 THU 04. 15/12 FRI 05. 16/12 SA T 06. 17/12 SUN 07. 18/12 MON 08. 19/12 TUE 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 File Date/Time Chair No. 2 10:00 12/05/2003 Size 1920 x 1440 Currently selected thumbnail File information Pages in file view Pages in folder list Currently selected folder in folder list RL_s Singapore.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 9 67 En Note ⢠You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.) Zooming the screen During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL button to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) to move the zoomed area within the picture. Rotating the screen You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ⢠During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90ú. Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90ú. 2x Zoom î î RL_s Singapore.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 10 68 En Chapter 10 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu: ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc SetupâÂÂ. Basic settings Input Disc Name When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 1 Select âÂÂInput Disc Nameâ from the Basic options, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select characters. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower- case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( îÂÂ/ î ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 57. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. Note ⢠You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Lock Disc ⢠Default setting: Off Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off . Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode VR mode Video mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc Next Screen Disc Setup Input Disc Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø D ISC7 VR mode Basic Initialize Finalize Input Disc Name Lock Disc On Off Disc Setup RL_s Singapore.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 10 69 En Important â¢A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). Note ⢠You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. Initialize settings You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode recording or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 83). The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for example if you want to change the recording format of the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 53 for detailed instructions. Finalize settings Finalize Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 52 for detailed instructions. Undo Finalize You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 From the Disc Setup menu, select âÂÂFinalizeâÂÂ, then âÂÂUndo Finalizeâ from the finalize options. 2 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. Note ⢠You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on page 74 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-RW DVD-RW RL_s Singapore.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 11 70 En Chapter 11 The Video/Audio Adjust menu Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. Choosing a preset 1 With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the preset. ⢠Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: ⢠Tuner â suitable for general TV broadcasts ⢠VCR â suitable for video cassettes ⢠LDP â suitable for Laserdiscs ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VCR or LDP ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠3-D Y/C â Adjusts the brightness/color separation (NTSC video only). ⢠VNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied to the video signal. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White AGC â Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colors appear. Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode T uner Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Detailed Settings Pr 5 Memory1 Off Max Off Detail White AGC Black Setup Motion Still 3-D Y/C VNR Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Pr 5 0 IRE On RL_s Singapore.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 11 71 En 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Note ⢠When White AGC is On , the White Level setting canâÂÂt be adjusted. ⢠The 3-D Y/C and Black Setup settings apply only to NTSC video input. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the setting. There are six presets available: ⢠TV(CRT) â suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs ⢠PDP â suitable for plasma display screens ⢠Professional â suitable for professional monitors ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV(CRT) , PDP or Professional ). 4 Press ENTER to select the preset. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Move the cursor down and select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠Pure Cinema â When watching DVD movies, Pure Cinema optimizes the picture quality. If the picture appears unnatural on the default Auto setting, change to On or Off as desired. (Note that this setting can only be adjusted when the video output is set to progressive.) See also PureCinema in the Glossary on page 97. ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component (has no effect when the video output is set to progressive). ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (color) component (has no effect when the video output is set to progressive). ⢠QNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colors appear. TV(CRT) Detailed Settings Memory1 Detailed Settings Memory1 Off Max Off Max Off Max YNR CNR QNR Off Max Detail Min Max Min Max White Level Black Level Pure Cinema Auto RL_s Singapore.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 11 72 En 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Note ⢠The Black Setup setting applies only when playing NTSC discs. Audio DRC ⢠Default setting: Off When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, itâÂÂs easy to lose low level sounds completelyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. 1 During playback or when paused, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo/Audio AdjustâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂAudio AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust DRC from âÂÂOffâ to âÂÂMaxâÂÂ. Exactly how much difference you can hear between the settings will depend on the material. Remember ⢠Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital . In this case adjust the dynamic range from your AV amplifier/receiver. Off Max Audio DRC Audio Adjust RL_s Singapore.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 73 En Chapter 12 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SetupâÂÂ. ⢠Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. ⢠Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. Note ⢠Some of the Initial Setup menu screens shown in this section vary slightly depending on the country or region of purchase. Basic settings Clock Setting The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before you can use any of the timer recording features. The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast station transmitting clock signals, or manually. Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to display the clock setting screen. Use the Display option to set the date and time format (12 or 24-hour clock, etc.) ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually: ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set your time zone, then press ENTER . ⢠Press î (cursor down) then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set summertime On or Off , then press ENTER . Timer Recording Disc Navigator Disc History PhotoViewer Disc Setup Initial Setup Vi deo/Audio Adjust Play Mode Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Auto Manual Display Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH Pr 1 Initial Setup Start Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone Summer Time Off 1/ 2 Singapore Singapore Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 74 En ⢠Set the current date and time. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠Display options From this screen you can choose how you want the date and time to be displayed. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set the date format. ⢠Press î (cursor down) then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to set the clock format. Note ⢠When you use the Setup Navigator, the date and time formats will be reset to the default for your country/ region. Input Line System ⢠Default setting: 625 System For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input line system to 625 System . When recording an NTSC or PALâÂÂ60 signal through an external input, change to 525 System . Note ⢠If when this setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel button then pressing DISC NAVIGATOR (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. ⢠You canâÂÂt mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. ⢠When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see Input Colour System on page 77). ⢠Changing the tuner country setting in the Setup Navigator or using the Auto or Manual Channel Setting functions may change the Input Line System setting. On Screen Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen operation displays ( Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off to hide these displays. Front Panel Display ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, the time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to Off to have the front panel display switch off completely when in standby. Note ⢠When set to Off , the display still lights dimly in standby when setting a timer recording, or during Auto Start Recording. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Manual Clock Setting 2/2 Date T ime T ime Zone Summer Time 01 01 2004 THU 00 00 Singapore Singapore Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Clock Setting Date & Time Display 15:00 Wed 15/ 12/ 2004 Date Format Clock Format day / month / year 24Hour 0:00-23:59 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator 525System 625System Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 75 En Power Save ⢠Default setting: Off When set to Off , signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN terminal are passed through to the ANTENNA OUT terminal when the recorder is in standby. You can cut the standby power consumption of the recorder by turning off the through function for one or both terminals: ⢠On â No through function for the antenna terminal ⢠Off â Through function for the antenna terminal Remote Control Set ⢠Default setting: Recorder1 You only need to set this if you are using more than one Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room. So that each remote control operates only its own recorder, make this setting different for each recorder and remote in the room. There are three different recorder IDs. When set to Recorder2 or Recorder3 , the remote control mode is shown in the front panel display. After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the change by selecting Yes or No (use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER . Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote to the same ID. To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ) until the indicator on the remote lights. Setup Navigator ⢠Default setting: n/a The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings menu should you need it at any other time. See also Switching on and setting up on page 23. Tuner settings Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/ G, PAL-1, SECAM D/K and NTSC M/N programs off the air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip (described below). 1 Choose âÂÂTunerâ from the Initial Setup menu, then âÂÂAuto Channel SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Select your country then press ENTER to start tuning. ⢠You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by pressing ENTER again. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Recorder1 Recorder2 Recorder3 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Clock Setting Input Line System On Screen Display Front Panel Display Power Save Remote Control Set Setup Navigator Start Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Initial Setup Next Screen Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Auto Channel Setting Auto Channel Setting Country Singapore Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 76 En After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page. 3 Press HOME MENU to exit this screen. Note ⢠You can fine-tune individual stations using the Manual CH Setting feature. See Manual CH Setting below for how to use this. Manual CH Setting The channel skip function lets you skip channels where there is no station so that as you change channels using the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons, you only change to channels that have a station. The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune to stations, should you need to. 1 Select âÂÂManual CH SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen. 2 Select your country. 3 Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting screen. ⢠Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the number buttons to change channels. From this screen there are eight parameters you can set: ⢠Skip â If you want to skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On . ⢠CH System â Set the channel system used in your area or region. ⢠Channel â Change the channel number assigned to the current preset. ⢠AFT (Auto Fine Tune) â When set to On , the station is automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune (see below). ⢠Level â Set the AFT level (see above). ⢠Sound System â Set the sound system used for the current channel. ⢠Name â Move the cursor right then input a name for the current station, (up to five characters) then press ENTER . Channel Swapping The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel assignments of different programs. This is so that you can group together station presets which naturally go together. 1 Select âÂÂChannel SwappingâÂÂ. Pr System CH Name 1 B/G 26 2 B/G 33 3 B/G 23 4 B/G 30 5 B/G 37 6 B/G 35 7 B/G 39 8 B/G 26 Pr System CH Name 9 B/G 9 10 B/G 25 11 B/G 11 12 B/G 12 13 B/G 13 14 B/G 14 15 B/G 15 16 B/G 16 Initial Setup 1/7 Channel Mapping Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Manual Channel Setting Manual Channel Setting Country Singapore Initial Setup Skip CH System Channel AFT Level Sound System Name Pr 1 Off Western Euro 2 On B/G Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Next Screen Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 77 En 2 Select âÂÂNext Screenâ to go to the swap presets screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a preset station to swap. ⢠Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/ next page. 4 Press î (cursor right), then select a preset station to swap with the first preset. 5 Press ENTER to swap the presets. 6 If you want to swap more presets, press î (cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5. 7 Press HOME MENU to finish and exit. G-Code CH Setting ⢠Default setting: n/a Guide channels are used by the G-Code system so that the channel number specified in the G-Code programming numbers can be guaranteed to correspond to the correct station. 1 Select âÂÂG-Code CH SettingâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as necessary. Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to change the guide channel for setting. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the channel number. ⢠Use the PREV / NEXT button to display the previous/ next 10 guide channels. 3 To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER. Video In / Out settings Input Colour System ⢠Default setting: Auto On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PALâÂÂ60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it manually if the picture is not displayed properly. 11 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 51 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup 53 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 Pr System CH Name 1 B/G CC40 2 B/G 2 3 B/G 3 4 B/G 4 5 B/G 5 6 B/G 6 [1 ] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Swap Preset Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting Next Screen Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Auto Channel Setting Manual CH Setting Channel Swapping G-Code CH Setting G-Code CH Setting G-Code CH Setting Guide Preset Guide Preset 1/26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System Component Video NTSC on P AL TV Next Screen Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 78 En 1 Select âÂÂInput Colour SystemâÂÂ, then âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 2 Use the CHANNEL /â buttons or the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner and the external inputs. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the input colour system for the current input or built-in tuner. ⢠The available settings depend on the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 74). The table below shows the different options available. Component Video Out ⢠Default setting: Interlace You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to your TV using the component video jacks. If your TV is compatible with progressive-scan component video, set this Progressive for the highest quality picture. If your TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video, leave it set to Interlace . See also Progressive scan video in the glossary on page 97. Important If you switch to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the button on the front panel, then press DISC HISTORY . This will set the recorderâÂÂs video output back to Interlace . NTSC on PAL TV ⢠Default setting: Off When set to On , NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example) will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your TV is already NTSC-compatible. Depending on this setting and the Input Line System setting (see Input Line System on page 74), the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. Note ⢠Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if youâÂÂre not sure whether yours has this feature. Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 Auto Pr 5 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System Component Video NTSC on P AL TV Next Screen Initial Setup Compatibility of this unit with progressive-scan TVs Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the âÂÂstandard definitionâ output ( Interlace ). If there are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model, please contact our customer service center. This recorder is compatible with the following Pioneer displays and monitors Plasma display ⢠PDP-503HDG, PDP-433HDG, PDP-504HDG, PDP-434HDG Input Line System NTSC on P AL TV Output when stopped 625 System Off PAL On PAL 525 System Off NTSC On PALâÂÂ60 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Input Colour System Component Video NTSC on P AL TV On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 79 En Audio In settings NICAM Select ⢠Default setting: NICAM If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV broadcast, select Regular Audio , otherwise set to NICAM . (When set to NICAM , you can still select Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing audio channels on page 27.) Tuner Level ⢠Default setting: Normal Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessively high causing distortion. External Audio ⢠Default setting: Stereo If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to Stereo . If each channel carries a separate soundtrack, change to Bilingual . Bilingual Recording ⢠Default setting: A/L When recording a bilingual source from an external input in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32 , you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or the B/R (right) audio channel. Note ⢠If youâÂÂre recording in VR mode (except when set to FINE/MN32 ), both channels will be recorded and you can switch them as you like on playback. Input Level (L1 / L2 / L3) ⢠Default setting: 0dB You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external input individually, from âÂÂ6dB to 6dB in steps of 3 dB to optimize the recorded audio level. Audio Out settings Digital Out ⢠Default setting: On If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio output, set this to Off , otherwise leave it On . Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) NICAM Regular Audio Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) Normal Compression Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) Stereo Bilingual Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) A/L B/R Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback NICAM Select T uner Level External Audio Bilingual Recording Input Level (L1) Input Level (L2) Input Level (L3) Initial Setup 6dB 3dB 0dB âÂÂ3 d B âÂÂ6 d B Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 80 En Note ⢠When set to Off , all the other Audio Out settings are grayed out and canâÂÂt be set. Dolby Digital Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: Dolby Digital If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital , otherwise set to Dolby Digital î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible. DTS Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: On If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On , otherwise set to Off . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is DTS compatible. Important ⢠If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/ receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠When set to On , there is no analog audio output when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out is Off ), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do not play this through your amplifier and speakers. ⢠When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See Switching audio channels on page 41. 96kHz PCM Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: 96kHz î 48kHz If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96 kHz), set to 96kHz , otherwise set to 96kHz î 48kHz . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is compatible with high sampling rate audio. MPEG Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using the digital output. ⢠Default setting: MPEG î PCM If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG , otherwise set to MPEG î PCM . Check the manual that came with the connected component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is MPEG compatible. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital î PCM Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out 96kHz î 48kHz 96kHz Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Digital Out Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out MPEG MPEG î PCM Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 81 En Language settings OSD Language ⢠Default setting: English This sets the language of the on-screen menus and displays. Audio Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that language (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language on page 81). Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 82). Tip ⢠You can switch between the languages recorded on a DVD disc any time during playback using the AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.) Subtitle Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language settingâÂÂsee Auto Language on page 81). Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 82). Tip ⢠You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE button. (This does not affect this setting.) Auto Language ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder selects the default audio language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your preferred subtitle language only if that is set to something different. In other words, movies in your native language wonâÂÂt have any subtitles, while foreign language movies will be shown with subtitles. Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly according to your Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings. For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language settings must be the sameâÂÂsee Audio Language on page 81 and Subtitle Language on page 81. Note ⢠Even when set to On , Auto Language may not work with some discs. In this case, set the audio and subtitle languages using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. Tip ⢠You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Chinese Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display English French German Italian Spanish Chinese Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 82 En DVD Menu Language ⢠Default setting: w/Subtitle Language Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several languages. This setting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting for menus to appear in the same language as your Subtitle Language âÂÂsee Subtitle Language on page 81. Choose Other if you want to specify a language other than those listed (see Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages on page 82). Subtitle Display ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the recorder displays subtitles according to the Subtitle Language and Auto Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off altogether (although you may find that some discs override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on to some DVD discs. Selecting âÂÂOtherâ languages 1 Select âÂÂOtherâ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 Select the language you want. ⢠Select by language name: Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/ right) buttons to change the language. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 92 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. 3 Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen. Recording settings Manual Recording ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting there are four different recording time/picture quality settings, FINE , SP , LP and EP . If you want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings. When recording, you can select your Manual Recording setting using the REC MODE button. 1 Select âÂÂOn (go to setup)â to display the manual recording setting screen. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to change the manual recording level. ⢠You can also use the î and î buttons to cycle between levels MN1 , MN9 , MN21 and MN32 . ⢠To preview the recording quality, press î (cursor down) and select Preview . To return to the level adjust screen, press ENTER . 3 Press ENTER to set the manual recording level and return to the menu screen. Note ⢠The preset picture quality settings correspond to the following manual settings: FINE : MN32 , SP : MN21 , LP : MN9 , EP : MN1 . ⢠See Language code list on page 92 for detailed information on the manual recording levels. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Chinese Other Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display On Off Assist Subtitle Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display DVD Menu Language DVD Menu Language English 0 514 Language Number Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. On (go to setup) Off Initial Setup Pr 5 EP LP SP FINE Preview DVD Remain 2h00m MN 9 (4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps RL_s Singapore.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 83 En Optimized Rec ⢠Default setting: Off On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy or G-Code programming system) is set but there isnâÂÂt enough space on the disc at the recording quality set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the available disc space. Note ⢠You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the remaining time available on the disc. ⢠If, even on recording level MN 1 , there is insufficient space available on the disc, the recording is made at level MN 1 but recording will stop once the disc is full. ⢠Optimized Recording only compensates for the first (earliest starting) timer program if more than one has been set. Navi Mark ⢠Default setting: 0 seconds In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0 seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used). Auto Chapter (Video) ⢠Default setting: 10 minutes When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change this interval to 15 minutes , or switch off automatic chapter marking altogether with the No Separation setting. DVD-RW Auto Init. ⢠Default setting: VR Mode When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording. Playback settings TV Screen Size ⢠Default setting: 4:3 (Letter Box) If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 settingâ widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full screen area. When playing software recorded in conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will determine how the material is presentedâÂÂsee the manual that came with your TV for details on what options are available. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback On Off Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback 0 seconds 30 seconds 3 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback No Separation 10 minutes 15 minutes Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback VR Mode Vi deo Mode Manual Recording Optimized Rec Navi Mark Auto Chapter (Video) DVD-RW Auto Init. Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) 16:9 Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 84 En If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . In Letter Box mode, widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even though the picture looks larger on the screen, youâÂÂre actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and disc formats on page 88 for more information. Still Picture ⢠Default setting: Auto The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting automatically chooses the best setting each time. ⢠Field â produces a stable, generally shake-free image. ⢠Frame â produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than field stills. Seamless Playback ⢠Default setting: Off During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice momentary interruption in the picture at edited points. The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback. When switched On , you may notice that the edit points are a few frames earlier or later than you set. Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ⢠Default password: none ⢠Default Country code: us (2119) Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will require you to enter a password before the disc will play. This gives you some control about what your children watch on your DVD recorder. Some discs also support the Country code feature. The recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs depending on the Country code you set. Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country code you must set a password. As the password owner you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code whenever you like. You can also change the password. Note ⢠Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for your children use the Parental Lock feature. These discs will always play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 87), then set a new password. Parental Lock : Set Password The password you set will enable you to change the Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the password that you will need to enter if you want to play a disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder. 1 Select âÂÂSet PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to input a four-digit password. 3 Press ENTER to set the password. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Field Frame Auto Initial Setup VR mode Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Set Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Set Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 85 En Parental Lock : Change Password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂChange PasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Enter a new password. 5 Press ENTER. Parental Lock : Change Level 1 Select âÂÂChange LevelâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a new parental lock level. 4 Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level. Parental Lock : Country Code You may also want to refer to the Country code list on page 92. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER. 3 Select a Country code. There are two ways you can do this. Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Change Password Current Password New Password 1 2 3 4 5 678 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock : Change Level Password Off 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Change Password Change Level Country Code Initial Setup TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number us 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 9 Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 12 86 En ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) to change the country code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor down) then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit country code (you can find the Country code list on page 92.) 4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code. Note ⢠Changing the country code does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Angle Indicator ⢠Default setting: On On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on- screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen indicator. TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator Parental Lock Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Parental Lock: Country Code Password Code Number 1 2 3 4 Initial Setup us 2 1 1 9 Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback TV Screen Size Still Picture Seamless Playback Parental Lock Angle Indicator On Off Initial Setup RL_s Singapore.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 87 En Chapter 13 Additional information Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Press and hold î STOP and press î STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. The LED indicator on the remote controls lights. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2 Press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/ off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TVâÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Maker Code Alba 66 Bush 76 Finlux 84 Fisher 61, 65 F ujitsu 77 F unai 67 Goldstar 79 Grandiente 87 Grundig 51, 82 Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86 IT T 70 Mitsubishi 59 Nokia 53, 81 P anasonic 58, 72 Philips 57, 85 P ioneer 50, 80 RCA 68 Salora 71 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 74 Sei 78 Sharp 52 Sony 54 T andy 69 T elefunken 64 Thomson 62 T oshiba 55 Victor 63 RL_s Singapore.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 88 En Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture ï¬Âlls the whole screen. 4:3 16:9 The program appears squashed. Set to either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The program is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presentedâÂÂcheck the manual that came with the TV for details. RL_s Singapore.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 89 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 94). ⢠Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 97). No picture ⢠Check that ever ything is connected properly (page 12). ⢠Check that the connected TV and/or the A V amp/receiver is set to the correct input. ⢠The recorder may be set to progressive-scan with an incompatible TV . Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the button (front panel) then pressing DISC HISTORY (front panel). CanâÂÂt play a disc ⢠Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or other incompatible format disc (page 9). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 94). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). ⢠There may be condensation in the recorder . Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. All settings are r eset ⢠If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. ⢠Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. Screen goes blank and contr ols are inoperative ⢠P ress î STOP then restart playback. Remote control does not work ⢠If you connected this recorder to another P ioneer product using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12). ⢠Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 75). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .) ⢠Use the remote within its operating range (page 8). ⢠Replace the batteries (page 8). No sound or sound is distorted ⢠Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. ⢠There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play . P ress î PLAY to resume regular playback. ⢠DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver . If you have connected a suitable decoder , also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On . ⢠Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog. ⢠Check the audio cable connections (page 12). ⢠If the sound is distorted, tr y cleaning the cable plugs. The picture fr om the external input is distorted ⢠If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder . Connect the component directly to your TV . RL_s Singapore.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 90 En The picture is distorted ⢠Change the Input Line System setting (page 74). (Y ou can also change it by pressing the button and DISC NAVIGATOR on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) Screen is str etched vertically or hori- zontally ⢠Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 83) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 88). ⢠If you have a widescreen TV , check its aspect ratio settings. ⢠This recorder âÂÂs input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. CanâÂÂt play a disc r ecorded using this recor der on another player ⢠If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that itâÂÂs ï¬Ânalized (page 52). â¢Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode and ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be speciï¬Âcally RW compatible in order to play it (page 9). ⢠Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non- CPRM compatible players (page 43). During playback the picture is dark or distorted ⢠When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR , the picture will not display correctly . Connect the recorder directly to your TV . CanâÂÂt contr ol your TV using this remote contr ol ⢠If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV , tr y each one in turn (page 87). ⢠It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of TV , even if the maker appears in the remote control code list. CanâÂÂt r ecord or does not r ecord suc- cessfully ⢠Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD. ⢠F or a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn âÂÂt already ï¬Ânalized. ⢠A DVD disc may contain up to 99 (Original) titles and 999 chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached. ⢠Check that the source you are tr ying to record is not copy protected. ⢠F or a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isnâÂÂt locked (page 68). ⢠Check that you are recording with the same TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system (page 74). ⢠The power may have failed during recording. Timer program doesnâ t recor d suc- cessfully ⢠When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder âÂÂs built-in TV tuner , not the TV âÂÂs built-in tuner . ⢠When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 43). ⢠T wo timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely . ⢠The power may have failed during recording. ⢠Check that the recorder âÂÂs TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) settings are the same as the channel set for recording. After brieï¬Ây unplugging or after a power failure the fr ont panel dis- play shows âÂÂ--:--â â¢ A backup batter y inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder . This batter y should last approximately ï¬Âve years from factor y shipping. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again . T o have the batter y replaced, contact your dealer or a P ioneer Ser vice Center . Front panel display shows âÂÂLOCKâ when a button is pressed ⢠The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 49). Problem Remedy RL_s Singapore.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 91 En Note ⢠If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. Frequently asked questions In this section you can find answers to frequently asked questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it can do. ⢠What kind of discs can I use for recording? You can use DVD-R and DVD-RW discs for recording. DVD-RAM, CD-R and CD-RW discs are not recordable using this recorder. See Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 9 for more details. ⢠Can I watch recordings made using this recorder on other DVD players? Yes. Use a DVD-R disc for you recordings (these are always recorded in Video mode). After recording, finalize the disc to make it playable on other DVD players (note that you cannot make further recordings on the disc after finalizing it). If you want to use a DVD-RW disc, make sure that itâÂÂs initialized for recording in Video mode. As with a DVD-R, finalize the disc after recording to make it playable in other players. See also Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 52. ⢠Can I edit recordings, or erase parts of recordings from a disc? Yes. Recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc gives you the most flexibility when editing. By default, when you load a new DVD-RW disc into the recorder it is initialized for recording in VR mode. See also Editing on page 54. ⢠Can I play a VR mode DVD-RW disc in another DVD player? Look for the âÂÂRW Compatibleâ mark on the other DVD player to see if it will play VR mode DVD-RW discs. If the player does not recognize the disc when you load it, try finalizing it in the recorder, then try again. See also Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 52. ⢠Can I record a copy-once protected program from a subscription satellite or cable channel? Yes, but youâÂÂll need to use a CPRM-compatible DVD- RW disc initialized for VR mode recording. (Look on the disc package to see if it is CPRM compatible.) See also CPRM on page 43. ⢠Can I play a disc while recording? Yes. For simultaneous recording and playback, use a 2x speed compatible DVD-RW initialized for VR mode recording (the disc should be a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or Ver. 1.2 / 4x CPRM-compatible). See also Simultaneous recording and playback on page 50. â¢I changed the batteries in the remote control and now it doesnâÂÂt work! Most likely the remote control ID does not match the recorder. After changing the batteries, the remote ID is reset to 1; if the recorder is set to something else, the remote will not work with it. See Remote Control Set on page 75 for how to set the ID of the recorder and the remote. The picture fr eezes and the front panel and remote contr ol buttons stop working ⢠P ress the front panel î STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off , then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off , press and hold î STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off . Problem Remedy RL_s Singapore.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 92 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country code list Country, Country code , Country code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us RL_s Singapore.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 93 En On-screen displays and recorder displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action ⢠Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. ⢠Incompatible region number . The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play . ⢠Cannot recor d any more titles. ⢠No more space for ï¬Âle management data. ⢠Cannot add any more chapter marks. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/ chapters or combine chapters. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. Undo the ï¬Ânal- ization. The disc was ï¬Ânalized on a non-P ioneer DVD recorder . Undo the ï¬Ânalization in order to recording/editing. ⢠Cannot play this disc. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. ⢠Cannot read the CPRM information. ⢠Could not recor d the information to the disc. ⢠Cannot edit. ⢠Could not initialize disc. ⢠Could not complete ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not undo ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. T ake out the disc, clean it and retr y . If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD R/RW or some other incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. ⢠Cannot recor d to a disc that is not CPRM com- patible. ⢠Cannot recor d this content using Video mode recor ding. The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD -RW disc with CPRM for recording. ⢠This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. ⢠Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damagedâÂÂplease consult a P ioneer Ser vice Center . ⢠The audio will conform to the [Bilingual Recording] setting. When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. Y ou can only record the left or right channel; not both. ⢠Operation stopped due to power failure. If during recording the power plug is disconnected from the power outlet, this message will be displayed the next time the recorder is switched on. In this case, the recording will not be recoverable. ⢠Repairing disc. This message is displayed when, due to damage or recording conditions, the recorder attempts to repair a disc. ⢠Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc. ⢠Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLA Y to clear this message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a P ioneer authorized ser vice center . RL_s Singapore.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 94 En Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD recorderâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer- authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD players are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. ⢠This channelâ s TV system is differ ent from the recor derâ s setting. The TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder . The input source has no video signal. ⢠Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLA Y to clear message. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder . ⢠Playback has stopped because the TV system is differ ent than the recor ding. During recording or timer recording standby , the TV System (P AL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically . Message Explanation/Action RL_s Singapore.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 95 En Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat- generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if thereâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press î STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recordingâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in Linear PCM format. VR mode Video mode Level Rec. time Level Rec. time MN 1 360 mins. EP MN 1 360 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 2 345 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 3 330 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 4 315 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 5 300 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 6 285 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 7 270 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 8 255 mins. MN 9 240 mins. LP MN 9 240 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins. MN 21 120 mins. SP MN 21 120 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins. MN 32 61 mins. FINE MN 32 61 mins. RL_s Singapore.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 96 En Glossary Analog audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). Chapter Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See also Title . Digital audio An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to- digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . Dolby Digital 1 With multichannel audio, this high quality surround system is used in many movie theaters around the world. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DRM (Digital Rights Management) DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other WMA recording equipment) and/or software. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround system different from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format for movies. âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Dynamic range The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic cinema-like effects. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indicates an MP3 file. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A file format used for still images, such as photographs and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ or âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂ. Most digital cameras use this format. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂ. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV amp/receivers. See also PCM . MPEG video The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard. Optical digital output A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks using a special optical cord, available from specialist audio dealers. RL_s Singapore.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 97 En PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio . PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only) A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good for discs that you would normally not watch from beginning to end all at onceâÂÂkaraoke discs, for example. Progressive scan video Also called non-interlaced video, this method of displaying a picture updates all the lines in one pass, resulting in a more stable, flicker-free image than interlaced video (for a given scanning rate). PureCinema Video on a DVD disc may be either video material (originally shot on video) or film material (originally shot on film). Video material has a frame rate of 30 frames/ second, compared to 24 frames/second for film. This recorder converts film material to 60 frames/second (in progressive scan mode). PureCinema adjusts the picture so that it matches more closely the picture quality of a cinema screen. You can see whether video on a DVD disc is film or video material by displaying the transfer rate. If a âÂÂ#â appears above the transfer rate display, it is film material. Regions (DVD only) (example region code marks) Regions associate discs and players with particular areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality, but the more digital information is generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples (measurements) per second. See also Digital audio . Title A collection of chapters on a DVD disc. See also Chapter . Track Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also Chapter . WMA WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.wmaâ or âÂÂ.WMAâÂÂ. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. 4 3 ALL RL_s Singapore.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 98 En Specifications General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, Video-CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA) Power requirements . . . . . . . 110âÂÂ127 / 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 W Power consumption in standby mode 0.68 W (Front panel display: off) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.0 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 339 (D) mm Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5ðC to 35ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5% to 85% (no condensation) TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC Recording Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording DVD-VIDEO Recordable discs DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc) DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc) Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz Compression format . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1âÂÂ6 hours Tuner Receivable channels Timer Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs Clock . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (12-hour/24-hour digital display) Power off memory . . . . Approx. 5 years (after manufacture) Input/Output VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(IEC connector) Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 3 (rear), 2 (front) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (color) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN Component video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 ⦠) PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R Input level VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM M/N - BTSC Channel E2 - E4 X - Z E5 - E12 S1 - S20 M1 - M10 U1 - U10 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 47 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel A - C X - Z D - J 11, 13 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 44 - 89 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz P AL B/G P AL I Channel 2 - 4 5 - 10 B - Q S21 - S41 21 - 69 Frequency 49 - 65 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 300 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz Channel R1 - R5 R6 - R12 S1 - S20 S21 - S41 E21 - E69 Frequency 49 - 94 MHz 104 - 300 MHz 302 - 470 MHz 470 - 862 MHz SECAM D/K NTSC M/N RL_s Singapore.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 13 99 En During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 L/R During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating Instructions Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. RL_s Singapore.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002E P ublished by P ioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 P ioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. <VRB1336-A> P rinted in China RL_s Singapore.book 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ